Reference Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsAccess PlatformsPowerSwitch S6000

Dell Configuration Guide for the S6000

System

9.5(0.0)

Summary of content (992 pages)

PAGE 1
Dell Configuration Guide for the S6000 System 9.5(0.
PAGE 2
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2014 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws.
PAGE 3
Contents 1 About this Guide......................................................................................................32 Audience..............................................................................................................................................32 Conventions........................................................................................................................................ 32 Related Documents...........................................................
PAGE 4
Management............................................................................................................54 Configuring Privilege Levels............................................................................................................... 54 Creating a Custom Privilege Level................................................................................................54 Removing a Command from EXEC Mode.................................................................................
PAGE 5
EAP over RADIUS........................................................................................................................... 77 Configuring 802.1X..............................................................................................................................77 Related Configuration Tasks......................................................................................................... 77 Important Points to Remember...........................................................
PAGE 6
Implementation Information....................................................................................................... 111 Configuration Task List for Prefix Lists........................................................................................ 111 ACL Resequencing.............................................................................................................................115 Resequencing an ACL or Prefix List..................................................................
PAGE 7
Implement BGP with Dell Networking OS....................................................................................... 163 Additional Path (Add-Path) Support........................................................................................... 163 Advertise IGP Cost as MED for Redistributed Routes................................................................ 163 Ignore Router-ID for Some Best-Path Calculations..................................................................
PAGE 8
Route Map Continue.................................................................................................................. 206 Enabling MBGP Configurations....................................................................................................... 206 BGP Regular Expression Optimization.............................................................................................207 Debugging BGP..............................................................................................
PAGE 9
ETS Prerequisites and Restrictions............................................................................................. 245 Creating a QoS DCB Output Policy........................................................................................... 245 Creating an ETS Priority Group...................................................................................................247 Applying an ETS Output Policy for a Priority Group to an Interface........................................
PAGE 10
Pause and Resume of Traffic...................................................................................................... 287 Buffer Sizes for Lossless or PFC Packets................................................................................... 288 Interworking of DCB Map With DCB Buffer Threshold Settings.................................................... 288 Configuring the Dynamic Buffer Method........................................................................................
PAGE 11
Creating an ECMP Group Bundle............................................................................................... 315 Modifying the ECMP Group Threshold.......................................................................................315 Support for /128 IPv6 and /32 IPv4 Prefixes in Layer 3 Host Table and LPM Table................. 316 Support for ECMP in host table..................................................................................................
PAGE 12
RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview........................................................................340 Preserving 802.1Q VLAN Tag Value for Lite Subinterfaces............................................................. 341 16 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)....................................................... 343 Protocol Overview............................................................................................................................ 343 Ring Status............
PAGE 13
Adjusting Query and Response Timers...................................................................................... 367 Adjusting the IGMP Querier Timeout Value.............................................................................. 368 Configuring a Static IGMP Group.................................................................................................... 368 Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave..................................................................................................
PAGE 14
Management Interfaces................................................................................................................... 390 Configuring Management Interfaces.........................................................................................390 Configuring Management Interfaces on the S-Series............................................................... 391 VLAN Interfaces.................................................................................................................
PAGE 15
Set Auto-Negotiation Options....................................................................................................415 View Advanced Interface Information..............................................................................................416 Configuring the Interface Sampling Size....................................................................................417 Dynamic Counters........................................................................................................
PAGE 16
UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses............................................................................... 438 UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses........................................................................ 439 UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses.................................................................. 439 Troubleshooting UDP Helper..........................................................................................................
PAGE 17
Synchronizing iSCSI Sessions Learned on VLT-Lags with VLT-Peer........................................466 Enable and Disable iSCSI Optimization..................................................................................... 466 Default iSCSI Optimization Values................................................................................................... 467 iSCSI Optimization Prerequisites.....................................................................................................
PAGE 18
Monitoring and Debugging LACP.............................................................................................. 503 Shared LAG State Tracking............................................................................................................... 503 Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking.................................................................................... 504 Important Points about Shared LAG State Tracking..................................................................
PAGE 19
CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations....................................................................538 Enabling LLDP................................................................................................................................... 539 Disabling and Undoing LLDP......................................................................................................539 Enabling LLDP on Management Ports.................................................................................
PAGE 20
Terminating a Peership......................................................................................................................571 Clearing Peer Statistics...................................................................................................................... 571 Debugging MSDP.............................................................................................................................. 572 MSDP with Anycast RP........................................................
PAGE 21
Networks and Neighbors........................................................................................................... 608 Router Types...............................................................................................................................608 Designated and Backup Designated Routers.............................................................................610 Link-State Advertisements (LSAs)..................................................................................
PAGE 22
Configuring PIM-SM......................................................................................................................... 661 Related Configuration Tasks.......................................................................................................661 Enable PIM-SM.................................................................................................................................. 661 Configuring S,G Expiry Timers.........................................................
PAGE 23
Modifying Global PVST+ Parameters............................................................................................... 691 Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters...........................................................................................692 Configuring an EdgePort..................................................................................................................693 PVST+ in Multi-Vendor Networks.............................................................................
PAGE 24
38 Routing Information Protocol (RIP).............................................................. 733 Protocol Overview............................................................................................................................ 733 RIPv1.............................................................................................................................................733 RIPv2...........................................................................................................
PAGE 25
Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN..............................................................................................765 Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag.................................................765 Configuring Dell Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports........................................................765 Debugging VLAN Stacking..........................................................................................................
PAGE 26
Important Points to Remember....................................................................................................... 789 Set up SNMP......................................................................................................................................789 Creating a Community............................................................................................................... 790 Setting Up User-Based Security (SNMPv3)....................................................
PAGE 27
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group........................................................................... 816 Modifying Global Parameters........................................................................................................... 817 Modifying Interface STP Parameters................................................................................................ 818 Enabling PortFast...............................................................................................
PAGE 28
49 Upgrade Procedures.........................................................................................844 Get Help with Upgrades................................................................................................................... 844 50 Virtual LANs (VLANs)......................................................................................... 845 Default VLAN..............................................................................................................................
PAGE 29
Sample RSTP Configuration........................................................................................................875 Configuring VLT.......................................................................................................................... 875 eVLT Configuration Example............................................................................................................887 eVLT Configuration Step Examples...................................................................
PAGE 30
DHCP...........................................................................................................................................922 VRF Configuration.............................................................................................................................922 Load VRF CAM.............................................................................................................................922 Creating a Non-Default VRF Instance...........................................
PAGE 31
Troubleshooting Packet Loss........................................................................................................... 973 Displaying Drop Counters...........................................................................................................973 Dataplane Statistics..................................................................................................................... 974 Display Stack Port Statistics...................................................................
PAGE 32
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. This guide supports the S6000 platform. The S6000 platform is available with Dell Networking OS version 9.0 (2.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information on protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference. This guide is a reference for configuring protocols on Dell Networking systems.
PAGE 33
Configuration Fundamentals 2 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for the Z9000, S6000, S4810, and S4820T except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
PAGE 34
• EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information. • EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted.
PAGE 35
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command AS-PATH ACL Dell(config-as-path)# ip as-path access-list Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-gi-0/0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) 10 Gigabit Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-te-0/1–2)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Interface Group Dell(conf-if-group)# interface(INTERFACE modes) Interface Range Dell(conf-if-range)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Loopback Interface Dell(conf-if-lo-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Management Ethernet Interface Dell(conf
PAGE 36
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command RAPID SPANNING TREE Dell(config-rstp)# protocol spanning-tree rstp REDIRECT Dell(conf-redirect-list)# ip redirect-list ROUTE-MAP Dell(config-route-map)# route-map ROUTER BGP Dell(conf-router_bgp)# router bgp BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY Dell(conf-router_bgp_af)# address-family {ipv4 multicast | ipv6 unicast} (for IPv4) (ROUTER BGP Mode) Dell(confrouterZ_bgpv6_af)# (for IPv6) ROUTER ISIS Dell(conf-router_isis)# router isis ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY Dell(conf-router
PAGE 37
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command LLDP MANAGEMENT INTERFACE Dell(conf-lldp-mgmtIf)# management-interface (LLDP Mode) LINE Dell(config-line-console) or Dell(config-line-vty) line console orline vty MONITOR SESSION Dell(conf-mon-sesssessionID)# monitor session OPENFLOW INSTANCE Dell(conf-of-instance-ofid)# openflow of-instance PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVERGROUP Dell(conf-po-failovergrp)# port-channel failovergroup PRIORITY GROUP Dell(conf-pg)# priority-group PROTOCOL GVRP Dell(config-gvrp)#
PAGE 38
-- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Management online S4810 S4810 9.4(0.
PAGE 39
no ip address no shutdown Layer 2 protocols are disabled by default. To enable Layer 2 protocols, use the no disable command. For example, in PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode, enter no disable to enable Spanning Tree. Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the ? or help command: • To list the keywords available in the current mode, enter ? at the prompt or after a keyword.
PAGE 40
Short-Cut Key Combination Action CNTL-A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line. CNTL-B Moves the cursor back one character. CNTL-D Deletes character at cursor. CNTL-E Moves the cursor to the end of the line. CNTL-F Moves the cursor forward one character. CNTL-I Completes a keyword. CNTL-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the command line. CNTL-L Re-enters the previous command.
PAGE 41
• show run | grep Ethernet returns a search result with instances containing a capitalized “Ethernet,” such as interface GigabitEthernet 0/0. • show run | grep ethernet does not return that search result because it only searches for instances containing a non-capitalized “ethernet.” • show run | grep Ethernet ignore-case returns instances containing both “Ethernet” and “ethernet.” The grep command displays only the lines containing specified text.
PAGE 42
NOTE: You can filter a single command output multiple times. The save option must be the last option entered. For example: Dell# command | grep regular-expression | except regular-expression | grep other-regular-expression | find regular-expression | save. Multiple Users in Configuration Mode Dell Networking OS notifies all users when there are multiple users logged in to CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 43
Getting Started 3 This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) during which the line card status light emitting diodes (LEDs) blink green. The system then loads the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption.
PAGE 44
Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1. Install an RJ-45 copper cable into the console port.Use a rollover (crossover) cable to connect the S4810 console port to a terminal server. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the DTE terminal server. 3.
PAGE 45
• Characters within the string can be letters, digits, and hyphens. To create a host name, use the following command. • Create a host name. CONFIGURATION mode hostname name Example of the hostname Command Dell(conf)#hostname R1 R1(conf)# Accessing the System Remotely You can configure the system to access it remotely by Telnet or SSH. • The S6000has a dedicated management port and a management routing table that is separate from the IP routing table.
PAGE 46
Configure a Management Route Define a path from the system to the network from which you are accessing the system remotely. Management routes are separate from IP routes and are only used to manage the system through the management port. To configure a management route, use the following command. • Configure a management route to the network from which you are accessing the system. CONFIGURATION mode management route ip-address/mask gateway – ip-address: the network address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.
PAGE 47
– level: is the privilege level, is 15 by default, and is not required – encryption-type: specifies how you are inputting the password, is 0 by default, and is not required. * 0 is for inputting the password in clear text. * 7 is for inputting a password that is already encrypted using a DES hash. Obtain the encrypted password from the configuration file of another Dell Networking system. * 5 is for inputting a password that is already encrypted using an MD5 hash.
PAGE 48
Example of Copying a File to an FTP Server Dell#copy flash://Dell-EF-8.2.1.0.bin ftp://myusername:mypassword@10.10.10.10/ /Dell/Dell-EF-8.2.1.0 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 27952672 bytes successfully copied Example of Importing a File to the Local System core1#$//copy ftp://myusername:mypassword@10.10.10.10//Dell/ Dell-EF-8.2.1.0.bin flash:// Destination file name [Dell-EF-8.2.1.0.bin.
PAGE 49
Configure the Overload Bit for a Startup Scenario For information about setting the router overload bit for a specific period of time after a switch reload is implemented, refer to the Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) section in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Viewing Files You can only view file information and content on local file systems. To view a list of files or the contents of a file, use the following commands. • View a list of files on the internal flash.
PAGE 50
View Configuration Files Configuration files have three commented lines at the beginning of the file, as shown in the following example, to help you track the last time any user made a change to the file, which user made the changes, and when the file was last saved to the startup-configuration.
PAGE 51
- - - network - network rw tftp: rw scp: You can change the default file system so that file management commands apply to a particular device or memory. To change the default directory, use the following command. • Change the default directory. EXEC Privilege mode cd directory View Command History The command-history trace feature captures all commands entered by all users of the system with a time stamp and writes these messages to a dedicated trace log buffer.
PAGE 52
Using Hashes to Validate Software Images You can use the MD5 message-digest algorithm or SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm to validate the software image on the flash drive, after the image has been transferred to the system, but before the image has been installed. The validation calculates a hash value of the downloaded image file on system’s flash drive, and, optionally, compares it to a Dell Networking published hash for that file.
PAGE 53
SHA256 Dell# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin SHA256 hash for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin: e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e933 Examples: Entering the Hash Value for Verification MD5 Dell# verify md5 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin 275ceb73a4f3118e1d6bcf7d75753459 MD5 hash VERIFIED for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin SHA256 Dell# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e933 SHA256 hash VERIFIED for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.
PAGE 54
4 Management Management is supported on the S6000 platform. This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell Networking system. Configuring Privilege Levels Privilege levels restrict access to commands based on user or terminal line. There are 16 privilege levels, of which three are pre-defined. The default privilege level is 1. Level Description Level 0 Access to the system begins at EXEC mode, and EXEC mode commands are limited to enable, disable, and exit.
PAGE 55
Allowing Access to CONFIGURATION Mode Commands To allow access to CONFIGURATION mode, use the privilege exec level level configure command from CONFIGURATION mode. A user that enters CONFIGURATION mode remains at his privilege level and has access to only two commands, end and exit. You must individually specify each CONFIGURATION mode command you want to allow access to using the privilege configure level level command.
PAGE 56
• Allow access to a CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode command. CONFIGURATION mode privilege {configure |interface | line | route-map | router} level level {command ||...
PAGE 57
aux Auxiliary line console Primary terminal line vty Virtual terminal Dell(conf)#line vty 0 Dell(config-line-vty)#? exit Exit from line configuration mode Dell(config-line-vty)# Dell(conf)#interface group ? fortyGigE FortyGigabit Ethernet interface gigabitethernet GigabitEthernet interface IEEE 802.
PAGE 58
• Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode • no logging monitor Disable console logging. CONFIGURATION mode no logging console Audit and Security Logs This section describes how to configure, display, and clear audit and security logs.
PAGE 59
When you enabled RBAC and extended logging: • Only the system administrator user role can execute this command. • The system administrator and system security administrator user roles can view security events and system events. • The system administrator user roles can view audit, security, and system events. • Only the system administrator and security administrator user roles can view security logs. • The network administrator and network operator user roles can view system events.
PAGE 60
The following describes the two log messages formats: • 0 – Displays syslog messages format as described in RFC 3164, The BSD syslog Protocol • 1 – Displays syslog message format as described in RFC 5424, The SYSLOG Protocol Example of Configuring the Logging Message Format Dell(conf)#logging version ? <0-1> Select syslog version (default = 0) Dell(conf)#logging version 1 Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server You can use reverse tunneling with the port forwarding to securely connect to a sy
PAGE 61
2. On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to FTOS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.48 and the listening port is 5141. The switch IP address is 10.16.131.141 and the listening port is 5140 ssh -R 5140:10.156.166.48:5141 admin@10.16.131.141 -nNf 3. Configure logging to a local host. locahost is “127.0.0.1” or “::1”.
PAGE 62
Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.Gerhards and Adiscon GmbH, March 2009, obsoletes RFC 3164 and RFC 5426 Transmission of Syslog Messages over UDP. • Specify the server to which you want to send system messages. You can configure up to eight syslog servers.
PAGE 63
• Specify the minimum severity level for logging to the syslog history table. CONFIGURATION mode • logging history level Specify the size of the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode logging buffered size • NOTE: When you decrease the buffer size, Dell Networking OS deletes all messages stored in the buffer. Increasing the buffer size does not affect messages in the buffer. Specify the number of messages that Dell Networking OS saves to its logging history table.
PAGE 64
%CHMGR-5-CHECKIN: Checkin from line card 5 (type EX1YB, 1 ports) %TSM-6-PORT_CONFIG: Port link status for LC 5 => portpipe 0: OK portpipe 1: N/A %CHMGR-5-LINECARDUP: Line card 5 is up %CHMGR-5-CHECKIN: Checkin from line card 12 (type S12YC12, 12 ports) %TSM-6-PORT_CONFIG: Port link status for LC 12 => portpipe 0: OK portpipe 1: N/A %CHMGR-5-LINECARDUP: Line card 12 is up %IFMGR-5-CSTATE_UP: changed interface Physical state to up: So 12/8 %IFMGR-5-CSTATE_DN: changed interface Physical state to down: So 12/8
PAGE 65
Example of the show running-config logging Command To view nondefault settings, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC mode. Dell#show running-config logging ! logging buffered 524288 debugging service timestamps log datetime msec service timestamps debug datetime msec ! logging trap debugging logging facility user logging source-interface Loopback 0 logging 10.10.10.
PAGE 66
CONFIGURATION mode service timestamps [log | debug] [datetime [localtime] [msec] [show-timezone] | uptime] Specify the following optional parameters: – You can add the keyword localtime to include the localtime, msec, and show-timezone. If you do not add the keyword localtime, the time is UTC. – uptime: To view time since last boot. If you do not specify a parameter, Dell Networking OS configures uptime. To view the configuration, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 67
CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server enable Example of Viewing FTP Configuration Dell#show running ftp ! ftp-server enable ftp-server username nairobi password 0 zanzibar Dell# Configuring FTP Server Parameters After you enable the FTP server on the system, you can configure different parameters. To specify the system logging settings, use the following commands. • Specify the directory for users using FTP to reach the system.
PAGE 68
– For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. – For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. CONFIGURATION mode • ip ftp source-interface interface Configure a password. CONFIGURATION mode • ip ftp password password Enter a username to use on the FTP client.
PAGE 69
line vty 0 access-class myvtyacl Dell Networking OS Behavior: Prior to Dell Networking OS version 7.4.2.0, in order to deny access on a VTY line, apply an ACL and accounting, authentication, and authorization (AAA) to the line. Then users are denied access only after they enter a username and password. Beginning in Dell Networking OS version 7.4.2.0, only an ACL is required, and users are denied access before they are prompted for a username and password.
PAGE 70
Dell(config-line-vty)#show config line vty 0 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist line vty 1 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist line vty 2 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist Dell(config-line-vty)# Setting Time Out of EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC time-out is a basic security feature that returns Dell Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines. To set time out, use the following commands.
PAGE 71
EXEC Privilege telnet [ip-address] If you do not enter an IP address, Dell Networking OS enters a Telnet dialog that prompts you for one. Enter an IPv4 address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Enter an IPv6 address in the format 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000. Elision of zeros is supported. Example of the telnet Command for Device Access Dell# telnet 10.11.80.203 Trying 10.11.80.203... Connected to 10.11.80.203. Exit character is '^]'.
PAGE 72
Example of Locking CONFIGURATION Mode for Single-User Access Dell(conf)#configuration mode exclusive auto BATMAN(conf)#exit 3d23h35m: %RPM0-P:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console Dell#config ! Locks configuration mode exclusively. Dell(conf)# If another user attempts to enter CONFIGURATION mode while a lock is in place, the following appears on their terminal (message 1): % Error: User "" on line console0 is in exclusive configuration mode.
PAGE 73
* persistent settings (stacking, fanout, etc.) * * After restoration the unit(s) will be powercycled immediately. * * Proceed with caution ! * *********************************************************************** Proceed with factory settings? Confirm [yes/no]:yes -- Restore status -Unit Nvram Config -----------------------0 Success Power-cycling the unit(s). ....
PAGE 74
802.1X 5 802.1X is supported on the S6000 platform. 802.1X is a method of port security. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity can be verified (through a username and password, for example). This feature is named for its IEEE specification. 802.
PAGE 75
Figure 3. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
PAGE 76
3. The authenticator decapsulates the EAP response from the EAPOL frame, encapsulates it in a RADIUS Access-Request frame and forwards the frame to the authentication server. 4. The authentication server replies with an Access-Challenge frame. The Access-Challenge frame requests that the supplicant prove that it is who it claims to be, using a specified method (an EAPMethod). The challenge is translated and forwarded to the supplicant by the authenticator. 5.
PAGE 77
EAP over RADIUS 802.1X uses RADIUS to shuttle EAP packets between the authenticator and the authentication server, as defined in RFC 3579. EAP messages are encapsulated in RADIUS packets as a type of attribute in Type, Length, Value (TLV) format. The Type value for EAP messages is 79. Figure 5. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1 Support Dell Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.
PAGE 78
Important Points to Remember • Dell Networking OS supports 802.1X with EAP-MD5, EAP-OTP, EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAPv0, PEAPv1, and MS-CHAPv2 with PEAP. • All platforms support only RADIUS as the authentication server. • If the primary RADIUS server becomes unresponsive, the authenticator begins using a secondary RADIUS server, if configured. • 802.1X is not supported on port-channels or port-channel members. 78 802.
PAGE 79
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 6. 802.1X Enabled 1. Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2. Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3. Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication 802.
PAGE 80
Examples of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally and on an Interface Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled. Dell#show running-config | find dot1x dot1x authentication ! [output omitted] ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! Dell# To view 802.
PAGE 81
To configure re-transmissions, use the following commands. • Configure the amount of time that the authenticator waits before re-transmitting an EAP Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x tx-period number The range is from 1 to 65535 (1 year) • The default is 30. Configure a maximum number of times the authenticator re-transmits a Request Identity frame. INTERFACE mode dot1x max-eap-req number The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2.
PAGE 82
The bold lines show the new re-transmit interval, new quiet period, and new maximum re-transmissions. FTOS(conf-if-range-Te-0/0)#dot1x tx-period 90 FTOS(conf-if-range-Te-0/0)#dot1x max-eap-req 10 FTOS(conf-if-range-Te-0/0)#dot1x quiet-period 120 FTOS#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 802.
PAGE 83
----------------------------Dot1x Status: Enable Port Control: FORCE_AUTHORIZED Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED Re-Authentication: Disable Untagged VLAN id: None Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 2 Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds Server Timeout: 30 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 3600 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST Auth PAE State: Initialize Backend State: Initialize Auth PAE State: Initialize Backend State: Initialize Re-Authenticating a Port You can configure the authent
PAGE 84
Port Control: FORCE_AUTHORIZED Port Auth Status: UNAUTHORIZED Re-Authentication: Enable Untagged VLAN id: None Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 10 Supplicant Timeout: 30 seconds Server Timeout: 30 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 7200 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: SINGLE_HOST Auth PAE State: Initialize Backend State: Initialize Auth PAE State: Initialize Backend State: Initialize Configuring Timeouts If the supplicant or the authentication server is unresponsive, the authenticator
PAGE 85
Guest VLAN: Disable Guest VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail VLAN: Disable Auth-Fail VLAN id: NONE Auth-Fail Max-Attempts: NONE Tx Period: 90 seconds Quiet Period: 120 seconds ReAuth Max: 10 Supplicant Timeout: 15 seconds Server Timeout: 15 seconds Re-Auth Interval: 7200 seconds Max-EAP-Req: 10 Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Enter the tasks the user should do after finishing this task (optional).
PAGE 86
Figure 7. Dynamic VLAN Assignment 1. Configure 8021.x globally (refer to Enabling 802.1X) along with relevant RADIUS server configurations (refer to the illustration inDynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). 2. Make the interface a switchport so that it can be assigned to a VLAN. 3. Create the VLAN to which the interface will be assigned. 4. Connect the supplicant to the port configured for 802.1X. 5.
PAGE 87
If the supplicant fails authentication, the authenticator typically does not enable the port. In some cases this behavior is not appropriate. External users of an enterprise network, for example, might not be able to be authenticated, but still need access to the network. Also, some dumb-terminals, such as network printers, do not have 802.1X capability and therefore cannot authenticate themselves.
PAGE 88
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)# Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)# Example of Viewing Configured Authentication View your configuration using the show config command from INTERFACE mode, as shown in th
PAGE 89
Access Control Lists (ACLs) 6 This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. • Access control lists (ACLs), Ingress IP and MAC ACLs , and Egress IP and MAC ACLs are supported on the S6000 platform. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
PAGE 90
• Port/VLAN based IMPLICIT DENY Rules • VRF based PERMIT/DENY Rules • VRF based IMPLICIT DENY Rules NOTE: In order for the VRF ACLs to take effect, ACLs configured in the Layer 3 CAM region must have an implicit-permit option. You can use the ip access-group command to configure VRF-aware ACLs on interfaces. Using the ip access-group command, in addition to a range of VLANs, you can also specify a range of VRFs as input for configuring ACLs on interfaces. The VRF range is from 1 to 63.
PAGE 91
• CAM Optimization User Configurable CAM Allocation User configurable CAM allocations are supported on the S6000 platform. Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in filter processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. (There are 16 FP blocks, but System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated.) Enter the ipv6acl allocation as a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).
PAGE 92
Implementing ACLs on Dell Networking OS You can assign one IP ACL per interface with Dell Networking OS. If you do not assign an IP ACL to an interface, it is not used by the software in any other capacity. The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification on entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation.
PAGE 93
closer to 0) before rules with higher-order numbers so that packets are matched as you intended. By default, all ACL rules have an order of 255. Example of the order Keyword to Determine ACL Sequence Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard acl1 Dell(config-std-nacl)#permit 20.0.0.0/8 Dell(config-std-nacl)#exit Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard acl2 Dell(config-std-nacl)#permit 20.1.1.
PAGE 94
To create a route map, use the following command. • Create a route map and assign it a unique name. The optional permit and deny keywords are the action of the route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] The default is permit. The optional seq keyword allows you to assign a sequence number to the route map instance. Configured Route Map Examples The default action is permit and the default sequence number starts at 10.
PAGE 95
The following example shows a route map with multiple instances. The show config command displays only the configuration of the current route map instance. To view all instances of a specific route map, use the show route-map command.
PAGE 96
Example of the match Command to Permit and Deny Routes Dell(conf)#route-map force permit 10 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 Dell(conf)#route-map force deny 20 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 Dell(conf)#route-map force deny 30 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 Configuring Match Routes To configure match criterion for a route map, use the following commands. • Match routes with the same AS-PATH numbers.
PAGE 97
• Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • match ipv6 next-hop {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} Match source routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • match ip route-source {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} Match source routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • match ipv6 route-source {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} Match routes with a specific value.
PAGE 98
CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • set local-preference value Specify a value for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • set metric {+ | - | metric-value} Specify an OSPF or ISIS type for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • set metric-type {external | internal | type-1 | type-2} Assign an IP address as the route’s next hop. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode • set next-hop ip-address Assign an IPv6 address as the route’s next hop.
PAGE 99
In the following example, the redistribute command calls the route map static ospf to redistribute only certain static routes into OSPF. According to the route map static ospf, only routes that have a next hop of Gigabitethernet interface 0/0 and that have a metric of 255 are redistributed into the OSPF backbone area. NOTE: When re-distributing routes using route-maps, you must create the route-map defined in the redistribute command under the routing protocol.
PAGE 100
Example of Using the continue Clause in a Route Map ! route-map test permit 10 match commu comm-list1 set community 1:1 1:2 1:3 set as-path prepend 1 2 3 4 5 continue 30! IP Fragment Handling Dell Networking OS supports a configurable option to explicitly deny IP fragmented packets, particularly second and subsequent packets. It extends the existing ACL command syntax with the fragments keyword for all Layer 3 rules applicable to all Layer protocols (permit/deny ip/tcp/udp/icmp).
PAGE 101
Layer 4 ACL Rules Examples The following examples show the ACL commands for Layer 4 packet filtering. Permit an ACL line with L3 information only, and the fragments keyword is present: If a packet’s L3 information matches the L3 information in the ACL line, the packet's FO is checked. • If a packet's FO > 0, the packet is permitted. • If a packet's FO = 0, the next ACL entry is processed.
PAGE 102
Configure a Standard IP ACL To configure an ACL, use commands in IP ACCESS LIST mode and INTERFACE mode. For a complete list of all the commands related to IP ACLs, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. To set up extended ACLs, refer to Configure an Extended IP ACL. A standard IP ACL uses the source IP address as its match criterion. 1. Enter IP ACCESS LIST mode by naming a standard IP access list. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard access-listname 2.
PAGE 103
If you are creating a standard ACL with only one or two filters, you can let Dell Networking OS assign a sequence number based on the order in which the filters are configured. The software assigns filters in multiples of 5. Configuring a Standard IP ACL Filter If you are creating a standard ACL with only one or two filters, you can let Dell Networking OS assign a sequence number based on the order in which the filters are configured. The software assigns filters in multiples of five. 1.
PAGE 104
To delete a filter, enter the show config command in IP ACCESS LIST mode and locate the sequence number of the filter you want to delete. Then use the no seq sequence-number command in IP ACCESS LIST mode. Configure an Extended IP ACL Extended IP ACLs filter on source and destination IP addresses, IP host addresses, TCP addresses, TCP host addresses, UDP addresses, and UDP host addresses.
PAGE 105
Configure Filters, TCP Packets To create a filter for UDP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for UDP packets.
PAGE 106
CONFIG-EXT-NACL mode {deny | permit} udp {source mask | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. The following example shows an extended IP ACL in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software.
PAGE 107
L2 ACL Behavior L3 ACL Behavior Decision on Targeted Traffic Permit Deny L3 ACL denies. Permit Permit L3 ACL permits. NOTE: If you configure an interface as a vlan-stack access port, only the L2 ACL filters the packets. The L3 ACL applied to such a port does not affect traffic. That is, existing rules for other features (such as trace-list, policy-based routing [PBR], and QoS) are applied to the permitted traffic. For information about MAC ACLs, refer to Layer 2.
PAGE 108
4. Apply rules to the new ACL. INTERFACE mode ip access-list [standard | extended] name To view which IP ACL is applied to an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode, or use the show running-config command in EXEC mode. Example of Viewing ACLs Applied to an Interface Dell(conf-if)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.2.1.100 255.255.255.
PAGE 109
Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended abcd Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit tcp any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#deny icmp any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit 1.1.1.2 Dell(config-ext-nacl)#end Dell#show ip accounting access-list ! Extended Ingress IP access list abcd on gigethernet 0/0 seq 5 permit tcp any any seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.2 Configure Egress ACLs Egress ACLs are supported on the S6000 platform.
PAGE 110
Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface te 0/0 Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)#ip vrf forwarding blue Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 ip vrf forwarding blue no ip address shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)# Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)# Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)#end Dell# Applying Egress Layer 3 ACLs (Control-Plane) By default, packets originated from the system are not filtered by egress ACLs.
PAGE 111
A route prefix is an IP address pattern that matches on bits within the IP address. The format of a route prefix is A.B.C.D/X where A.B.C.D is a dotted-decimal address and /X is the number of bits that should be matched of the dotted decimal address. For example, in 112.24.0.0/16, the first 16 bits of the address 112.24.0.0 match all addresses between 112.24.0.0 to 112.24.255.255. The following examples show permit or deny filters for specific routes using the le and ge parameters, where x.x.x.
PAGE 112
Creating a Prefix List To create a prefix list, use the following commands. 1. Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. You are in PREFIX LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2. Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action. CONFIG-NPREFIXL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • ge min-prefix-length: the minimum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32).
PAGE 113
Creating a Prefix List Without a Sequence Number To create a filter without a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2. Create a prefix list filter with a deny or permit action. CONFIG-NPREFIXL mode {deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32).
PAGE 114
ip prefix-list filter_in: count: 3, range entries: 3, sequences: 5 - 10 seq 5 deny 1.102.0.0/16 le 32 (hit count: 0) seq 6 deny 2.1.0.0/16 ge 23 (hit count: 0) seq 10 permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32 (hit count: 0) ip prefix-list filter_ospf: count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10 seq 5 deny 100.100.1.0/24 (hit count: 0) seq 6 deny 200.200.1.0/24 (hit count: 0) seq 7 deny 200.200.2.0/24 (hit count: 0) seq 10 permit 0.0.0.
PAGE 115
Applying a Filter to a Prefix List (OSPF) To apply a filter to routes in open shortest path first (OSPF), use the following commands. • Enter OSPF mode. CONFIGURATION mode • router ospf Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes. You can specify an interface. If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF mode • distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes.
PAGE 116
Table 5. ACL Resequencing Rules Resquencing Rules Before Resequencing: seq 5 permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 6 permit any host 1.1.1.2 seq 7 permit any host 1.1.1.3 seq 10 permit any host 1.1.1.4 Rules After Resequencing: seq 5 permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 10 permit any host 1.1.1.2 seq 15 permit any host 1.1.1.3 seq 20 permit any host 1.1.1.4 Resequencing an ACL or Prefix List Resequencing is available for IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs, prefix lists, and MAC ACLs.
PAGE 117
! ip access-list extended test remark 2 XYZ remark 4 this remark corresponds to permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 4 permit ip any host 1.1.1.1 remark 6 this remark has no corresponding rule remark 8 this remark corresponds to permit ip any host 1.1.1.2 seq 8 permit ip any host 1.1.1.2 seq 10 permit ip any host 1.1.1.3 seq 12 permit ip any host 1.1.1.4 Remarks that do not have a corresponding rule are incremented as a rule. These two mechanisms allow remarks to retain their original position in the list.
PAGE 118
Flow-Based Monitoring Support for ACLs Flow-based monitoring is supported on the S6000 platform. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only the specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies incoming packets that matches the ACL rules applied on the ingress port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port.
PAGE 119
destination port, and the endpoint to which the packet must be forwarded when a match occurs with the ACL entry. If you configure the flow-based enable command and do not apply an ACL on the source port or the monitored port, both flow-based monitoring and port mirroring do not function. Flow-based monitoring is supported only for ingress traffic and not for egress packets. The port mirroring application maintains a database that contains all monitoring sessions (including port monitor sessions).
PAGE 120
Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring is supported on the S6000 platform. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. 1. Enable flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session.
PAGE 121
-----0 A -----Te 0/0 Access Control Lists (ACLs) ----------Te 0/2 --rx ---- --------Flow N/A -------N/ 121
PAGE 122
7 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is supported only on the S6000 platform. BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism.
PAGE 123
NOTE: A session state change from Up to Down is the only state change that triggers a link state change in the routing protocol client. BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 8. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state.
PAGE 124
Field Description system clears the poll bit and sets the final bit in its response. The poll and final bits are used during the handshake and in Demand mode (refer to BFD Sessions). NOTE: Dell Networking OS does not currently support multi-point sessions, Demand mode, authentication, or control plane independence; these bits are always clear. Detection Multiplier The number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. Length The entire length of the BFD packet.
PAGE 125
BFD Sessions BFD must be enabled on both sides of a link in order to establish a session. The two participating systems can assume either of two roles: Active The active system initiates the BFD session. Both systems can be active for the same session. Passive The passive system does not initiate a session. It only responds to a request for session initialization from the active system.
PAGE 126
handshake. Now the discriminator values have been exchanged and the transmit intervals have been negotiated. 4. The passive system receives the control packet and changes its state to Up. Both systems agree that a session has been established. However, because both members must send a control packet — that requires a response — anytime there is a state change or change in a session parameter, the passive system sends a final response indicating the state change.
PAGE 127
receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 10. Session State Changes Important Points to Remember • On the platform, Dell Networking OS supports 128 sessions per stack unit at 200 minimum transmit and receive intervals with a multiplier of 3, and 64 sessions at 100 minimum transmit and receive intervals with a multiplier of 4. • Enable BFD on both ends of a link.
PAGE 128
• Configure BFD for IS-IS • Configure BFD for BGP • Configure BFD for VRRP • Configuring Protocol Liveness • Troubleshooting BFD Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet.
PAGE 129
Establishing a Session on Physical Ports To establish a session, enable BFD at the interface level on both ends of the link, as shown in the following illustration. The configuration parameters do not need to match. Figure 11. Establishing a BFD Session on Physical Ports 1. Enter interface mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface 2. Assign an IP address to the interface if one is not already assigned. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address 3.
PAGE 130
Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
PAGE 131
Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 7 Disabling and Re-Enabling BFD BFD is enabled on all interfaces by default, though sessions are not created unless explicitly configured. If you disable BFD, all of the sessions on that interface are placed in an Administratively Down state ( the first message example), and the remote systems are notified of the session state change (the second message example).
PAGE 132
Establishing Sessions for Static Routes Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. Figure 12. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes To establish a BFD session, use the following command. • Establish BFD sessions for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd Example of the show bfd neighbors Command to Verify Static Routes To verify that sessions have been created for static routes, use the show bfd neighbors command.
PAGE 133
• Change parameters for all static route sessions. CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information. Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down.
PAGE 134
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all OSPF neighbors.
PAGE 135
INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors Example of Verifying Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To view the established sessions, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Gi 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O * 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.
PAGE 136
• Disable BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors. ROUTER-OSPF mode • no bfd all-neighbors Disable BFD sessions with all OSPF neighbors on an interface. INTERFACE mode ip ospf bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for OSPFv3 BFD for OSPFv3 is only supported on the platform. BFD for OSPFv3 provides support for IPV6. Configuring BFD for OSPFv3 is a two-step process: 1. Enable BFD globally. 2. Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors.
PAGE 137
To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the example in Displaying BFD for BGP Information. • Change parameters for all OSPFv3 sessions. ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode • bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] Change parameters for OSPFv3 sessions on a single interface.
PAGE 138
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode • bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
PAGE 139
The bold line shows that IS-IS BFD sessions are enabled. R2(conf-router_isis)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_isis)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Gi 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role.
PAGE 140
INTERFACE mose isis bfd all-neighbors disable Configure BFD for BGP Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) for BGP is supported on the S6000 platform. In a BGP core network, BFD provides rapid detection of communication failures in BGP fast-forwarding paths between internal BGP (iBGP) and external BGP (eBGP) peers for faster network reconvergence. BFD for BGP is supported on 1GE, 10GE, 40GE, port-channel, and VLAN interfaces. BFD for BGP does not support IPv6 and the BGP multihop feature.
PAGE 141
Figure 15. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors The sample configuration shows alternative ways to establish a BFD session with a BGP neighbor: • By establishing BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by BGP (the bfd all-neighbors command). • By establishing a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor (the neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} bfd command) BFD packets originating from a router are assigned to the highest priority egress queue to minimize transmission delays.
PAGE 142
typical response is to terminate the peering session for the routing protocol and reconverge by bypassing the failed neighboring router. A log message is generated whenever BFD detects a failure condition. 1. Enable BFD globally. CONFIGURATION mode bfd enable 2. Specify the AS number and enter ROUTER BGP configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 3. Add a BGP neighbor or peer group in a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 4.
PAGE 143
ROUTER BGP mode • neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable Remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor. ROUTER BGP mode no neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable Use BFD in a BGP Peer Group You can establish a BFD session for the members of a peer group (the neighbor peer-group-name bfd command in ROUTER BGP configuration mode).
PAGE 144
Examples of the BFD show Commands The following example shows verifying a BGP configuration. R2# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 2 neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 1.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.2 no shutdown bfd all-neighbors The following example shows viewing all BFD neighbors.
PAGE 145
Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 5 Session Discriminator: 10 Neighbor Discriminator: 11 Local Addr: 2.2.2.3 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:66:da:34 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
PAGE 146
Down Admin Down : 0 : 2 The following example shows viewing BFD summary information. The bold line shows the message displayed when you enable BFD for BGP connections. R2# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 10.0.0.1, local AS number 2 BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 BFD is enabled, Interval 100 Min_rx 100 Multiplier 3 Role Active 3 neighbor(s) using 24168 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.
PAGE 147
Connections established 1; dropped 0 Last reset never Local host: 2.2.2.3, Local port: 63805 Foreign host: 2.2.2.2, Foreign port: 179 E1200i_ExaScale# R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.3 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.3, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP neighbor mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ...
PAGE 148
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. • Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
PAGE 149
The bold line shows that VRRP BFD sessions are enabled. Dell(conf-if-gi-4/25)#vrrp bfd all-neighbors Dell(conf-if-gi-4/25)#do show bfd neighbor * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) V - VRRP LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.5.1 2.2.5.2 Gi 4/25 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session.
PAGE 150
Disabling BFD for VRRP If you disable any or all VRRP sessions, the sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down control packet is sent to all neighbors and sessions on the remote system change to the Down state. To disable all VRRP sessions on an interface, sessions for a particular VRRP group, or for a particular VRRP session on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable all VRRP sessions on an interface. INTERFACE mode • no vrrp bfd all-neighbors Disable all VRRP sessions in a VRRP group.
PAGE 151
Down for neighbor 2.2.2.2 on interface Gi 4/24 (diag: 0) 00:54:38 : Sent packet for session with neighbor 2.2.2.2 on Gi 4/24 TX packet dump: Version:1, Diag code:0, State:Down, Poll bit:0, Final bit:0, Demand bit:0 myDiscrim:4, yourDiscrim:0, minTx:1000000, minRx:1000000, multiplier:3, minEchoRx:0 00:54:38 : Received packet for session with neighbor 2.2.2.
PAGE 152
Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) 8 Border gateway protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) version 4 (BGPv4) is supported on the S6000 platform. This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS).
PAGE 153
Figure 17. Internal BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network. Updates traveling through the network and returning to the same node are easily detected and discarded.
PAGE 154
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor.
PAGE 155
Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies. In order to make decisions in its operations with other BGP peers, a BGP process uses a simple finite state machine that consists of six states: Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm, and Established. For each peer-to-peer session, a BGP implementation tracks which of these six states the session is in.
PAGE 156
Route reflection divides iBGP peers into two groups: client peers and nonclient peers. A route reflector and its client peers form a route reflection cluster. Because BGP speakers announce only the best route for a given prefix, route reflector rules are applied after the router makes its best path decision. • If a route was received from a nonclient peer, reflect the route to all client peers. • If the route was received from a client peer, reflect the route to all nonclient and all client peers.
PAGE 157
• Next Hop NOTE: There are no hard coded limits on the number of attributes that are supported in the BGP. Taking into account other constraints such as the Packet Size, maximum number of attributes are supported in BGP. Communities BGP communities are sets of routes with one or more common attributes. Communities are a way to assign common attributes to multiple routes at the same time. NOTE: Duplicate communities are not rejected.
PAGE 158
Figure 20. BGP Best Path Selection Best Path Selection Details 1. Prefer the path with the largest WEIGHT attribute. 2. Prefer the path with the largest LOCAL_PREF attribute. 3. Prefer the path that was locally Originated via a network command, redistribute command or aggregate-address command. a. 4. Routes originated with the Originated via a network or redistribute commands are preferred over routes originated with the aggregate-address command.
PAGE 159
c. Paths with no MED are treated as “worst” and assigned a MED of 4294967295. 7. Prefer external (EBGP) to internal (IBGP) paths or confederation EBGP paths. 8. Prefer the path with the lowest IGP metric to the BGP if next-hop is selected when synchronization is disabled and only an internal path remains. 9. Dell Networking OS deems the paths as equal and does not perform steps 9 through 11, if the following criteria is met: a.
PAGE 160
and AS300. This is advertised to all routers within AS100, causing all BGP speakers to prefer the path through Router B. Figure 21. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria.
PAGE 161
Figure 22. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
PAGE 162
*> 7.0.0.0/30 *> 9.2.0.0/16 10.114.8.33 10.114.8.33 0 10 0 0 18508 18508 ? 701 i AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a eBGP neighbor. NOTE: Any update that contains the AS path number 0 is valid. The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
PAGE 163
Multiprotocol BGP Multiprotocol extensions for BGP (MBGP) is defined in IETF RFC 2858. MBGP allows different types of address families to be distributed in parallel. MBGP for IPv4 multicast is supported on the S6000 platform. MBGP allows information about the topology of the IP multicast-capable routers to be exchanged separately from the topology of normal IPv4 and IPv6 unicast routers. It allows a multicast routing topology different from the unicast routing topology.
PAGE 164
• internal configured, BGP advertises the metric configured in the redistribute command as MED. If BGP peer outbound route-map has metric configured, all other metrics are overwritten by this configuration. NOTE: When redistributing static, connected, or OSPF routes, there is no metric option. Simply assign the appropriate route-map to the redistributed route. The following table lists some examples of these rules. Table 6.
PAGE 165
Configure 4-byte AS numbers with the four-octet-support command. AS4 Number Representation Dell Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot. NOTE: The ASDOT and ASDOT+ representations are supported only with the 4-Byte AS numbers feature. If 4-Byte AS numbers are not implemented, only ASPLAIN representation is supported. ASPLAIN is the method Dell Networking OS has used for all previous Dell Networking OS versions.
PAGE 166
! router bgp 100 bgp asnotation asdot+ bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 31571, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS-PLAIN Dell(conf-router_bgp)#bgp asnotation asplain Dell(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do sho ip bgp BGP table version is 34558, local router ID is 172.30.1.
PAGE 167
appear as if it still belongs to Router B’s old network (AS 200) as far as communicating with Router C is concerned. Figure 23. Before and After AS Number Migration with Local-AS Enabled When you complete your migration, and you have reconfigured your network with the new information, disable this feature. If you use the “no prepend” option, the Local-AS does not prepend to the updates received from the eBGP peer.
PAGE 168
3. Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B. BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances Dell Networking OS BGP management information base (MIB) support with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05.
PAGE 169
• The f10BgpM2[Cfg]PeerReflectorClient field is populated based on the assumption that routereflector clients are not in a full mesh if you enable BGP client-2-client reflection and that the BGP speaker acting as reflector advertises routes learned from one client to another client. If disabled, it is assumed that clients are in a full mesh and there is no need to advertise prefixes to the other clients. • High CPU utilization may be observed during an SNMP walk of a large BGP Loc-RIB.
PAGE 170
By default, Dell Networking OS compares the MED attribute on different paths from within the same AS (the bgp always-compare-med command is not enabled). NOTE: In Dell Networking OS, all newly configured neighbors and peer groups are disabled. To enable a neighbor or peer group, enter the neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown command. The following table displays the default values for BGP on Dell Networking OS. Table 7.
PAGE 171
NOTE: Sample Configurations for enabling BGP routers are found at the end of this chapter. 1. Assign an AS number and enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number • as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.65535 (Dotted format). Only one AS is supported per system. NOTE: If you enter a 4-Byte AS number, 4-Byte AS support is enabled automatically. a. Enable 4-Byte support for the BGP process. NOTE: This command is OPTIONAL.
PAGE 172
3. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown Examples of the show ip bgp Commands NOTE: When you change the configuration of a BGP neighbor, always reset it by entering the clear ip bgp * command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the BGP configuration, enter show config in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view the BGP status, use the show ip bgp summary command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 173
For the router’s identifier, Dell Networking OS uses the highest IP address of the Loopback interfaces configured. Because Loopback interfaces are virtual, they cannot go down, thus preventing changes in the router ID. If you do not configure Loopback interfaces, the highest IP address of any interface is used as the router ID. To view the status of BGP neighbors, use the show ip bgp neighbors command in EXEC Privilege mode as shown in the first example.
PAGE 174
Connections established 0; dropped 0 Last reset never No active TCP connection Dell# The following example shows verifying the BGP configuration using the show running-config bgp command.. Dell#show running-config bgp ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list ISP1in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.
PAGE 175
bgp asnotation asplain • NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode • bgp asnotation asdot Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot+ Examples of the bgp asnotation Commands The following example shows the bgp asnotation asplain command output.
PAGE 176
Configuring Peer Groups To configure multiple BGP neighbors at one time, create and populate a BGP peer group. An advantage of peer groups is that members of a peer group inherit the configuration properties of the group and share same update policy. A maximum of 256 peer groups are allowed on the system. Create a peer group by assigning it a name, then adding members to the peer group. After you create a peer group, you can configure route policies for it.
PAGE 177
6. Add a neighbor as a remote AS. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number Formats: IP Address A.B.C.D • Peer-Group Name: 16 characters. • as-number: the range is from 0 to 65535 (2-Byte) or 1 to 4294967295 | 0.1 to 65535.65535 (4Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.65535 (Dotted format) To add an external BGP (EBGP) neighbor, configure the as-number parameter with a number different from the BGP as-number configured in the router bgp as-number command.
PAGE 178
neighbor 10.14.8.60 remote-as 18505 neighbor 10.14.8.60 no shutdown Dell(conf-router_bgp)# To enable a peer group, use the neighbor peer-group-name no shutdown command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode (shown in bold). Dell(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor zanzibar no shutdown Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 45 bgp fast-external-fallover bgp log-neighbor-changes neighbor zanzibar peer-group neighbor zanzibar no shutdown neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 65535 neighbor 10.1.1.1 shutdown neighbor 10.14.8.
PAGE 179
10.68.183.1 10.68.184.1 10.68.185.1 Dell> Configuring BGP Fast Fall-Over By default, a BGP session is governed by the hold time. BGP routers typically carry large routing tables, so frequent session resets are not desirable. The BGP fast fall-over feature reduces the convergence time while maintaining stability. The connection to a BGP peer is immediately reset if a link to a directly connected external peer fails.
PAGE 180
fall-over enabled Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 52, neighbor version 52 4 accepted prefixes consume 16 bytes Prefix advertised 0, denied 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 6; dropped 5 Last reset 00:19:37, due to Reset by peer Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 5 Recv: 0 Local host: 200.200.200.200, Local port: 65519 Foreign host: 100.100.100.
PAGE 181
You can constrain the number of passive sessions accepted by the neighbor. The limit keyword allows you to set the total number of sessions the neighbor will accept, between 2 and 265. The default is 256 sessions. 1. Configure a peer group that does not initiate TCP connections with other peers. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor peer-group-name peer-group passive limit Enter the limit keyword to restrict the number of sessions accepted. 2. Assign a subnet to the peer group.
PAGE 182
Example of the Verifying that Local AS Numbering is Disabled The first line in bold shows the actual AS number. The second two lines in bold show the local AS number (6500) maintained during migration. To disable this feature, use the no neighbor local-as command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.
PAGE 183
R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.
PAGE 184
• Defer best path selection for a certain amount of time. This helps optimize path selection and results in fewer updates being sent out. To enable graceful restart, use the configure router bgp graceful-restart command. • Enable graceful restart for the BGP node. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode • bgp graceful-restart Set maximum restart time for all peers. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [restart-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 120 seconds.
PAGE 185
• neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} graceful-restart [role receiver-only] Set the maximum time to retain the restarting neighbor’s or peer-group’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] The default is 360 seconds. Filtering on an AS-Path Attribute You can use the BGP attribute, AS_PATH, to manipulate routing policies. The AS_PATH attribute contains a sequence of AS numbers representing the route’s path.
PAGE 186
Example of the show ip bgp paths Command To view all BGP path attributes in the BGP database, use the show ip bgp paths command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 187
Regular Expression Definition [ ] (brackets) Matches any enclosed character and specifies a range of single characters. - (hyphen) Used within brackets to specify a range of AS or community numbers. _ (underscore) Matches a ^, a $, a comma, a space, or a {, or a }. Placed on either side of a string to specify a literal and disallow substring matching. You can precede or follow numerals enclosed by underscores by any of the characters listed.
PAGE 188
Redistributing Routes In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the BGP process. With the redistribute command, you can include ISIS, OSPF, static, or directly connected routes in the BGP process. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use any of the following commands in ROUTER BGP mode. • Include, directly connected or user-configured (static) routes in BGP.
PAGE 189
To allow multiple paths sent to peers, use the following commands. 1. Allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths replacing any previous ones. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp add-path [both|received|send] path-count count The range is from 2 to 64. 2. Allow the specified neighbor/peer group to send/ receive multiple path advertisements.
PAGE 190
To configure an IP community list, use these commands. 1. Create a community list and enter COMMUNITY-LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip community-list community-list-name 2. Configure a community list by denying or permitting specific community numbers or types of community.
PAGE 191
Configuring an IP Extended Community List To configure an IP extended community list, use these commands. 1. Create a extended community list and enter the EXTCOMMUNITY-LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip extcommunity-list extcommunity-list-name 2. Two types of extended communities are supported.
PAGE 192
Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1. Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2. Configure a match filter for all routes meeting the criteria in the IP community or IP extended community list.
PAGE 193
To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. If you want to remove or add a specific COMMUNITY number from a BGP path, you must create a route map with one or both of the following statements in the route map. Then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group. 1. Enter ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2.
PAGE 194
Dell>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 10.114.8.48 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best, i - internal Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network * i 3.0.0.0/8 *>i 4.2.49.12/30 * i 4.21.132.0/23 *>i 4.24.118.16/30 *>i 4.24.145.0/30 *>i 4.24.187.12/30 *>i 4.24.202.0/30 *>i 4.25.88.0/30 *>i 6.1.0.0/16 *>i 6.2.0.0/22 *>i 6.3.0.0/18 *>i 6.4.0.0/16 *>i 6.5.0.0/19 *>i 6.8.0.0/20 *>i 6.9.0.0/20 *>i 6.10.0.0/15 *>i 6.14.0.0/15 *>i 6.133.0.
PAGE 195
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp default local-preference value – value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. A more flexible method for manipulating the LOCAL_PREF attribute value is to use a route map. 1. Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map. CONFIGURATION mode route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] 2.
PAGE 196
set next-hop ip-address Changing the WEIGHT Attribute To change how the WEIGHT attribute is used, enter the first command. You can also use route maps to change this and other BGP attributes. For example, you can include the second command in a route map to specify the next hop address. • Assign a weight to the neighbor connection. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight weight – weight: the range is from 0 to 65535. • The default is 0. Sets weight for the route.
PAGE 197
For inbound and outbound updates the order of preference is: • prefix lists (using the neighbor distribute-list command) • AS-PATH ACLs (using the neighbor filter-list command) • route maps (using the neighbor route-map command) Prior to filtering BGP routes, create the prefix list, AS-PATH ACL, or route map. For configuration information about prefix lists, AS-PATH ACLs, and route maps, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs).
PAGE 198
• If the prefix list contains no filters, all routes are permitted. • If none of the routes match any of the filters in the prefix list, the route is denied. This action is called an implicit deny. (If you want to forward all routes that do not match the prefix list criteria, you must configure a prefix list filter to permit all routes. For example, you could have the following filter as the last filter in your prefix list permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32).
PAGE 199
Filtering BGP Routes Using AS-PATH Information To filter routes based on AS-PATH information, use these commands. 1. Create a AS-PATH ACL and assign it a name. CONFIGURATION mode ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2. Create a AS-PATH ACL filter with a deny or permit action. AS-PATH ACL mode {deny | permit} as-regular-expression 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5.
PAGE 200
• Assign an ID to a router reflector cluster. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp cluster-id cluster-id • You can have multiple clusters in an AS. Configure the local router as a route reflector and the neighbor or peer group identified is the route reflector client. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-reflector-client When you enable a route reflector, Dell Networking OS automatically enables route reflection to all clients.
PAGE 201
Configuring BGP Confederations Another way to organize routers within an AS and reduce the mesh for IBGP peers is to configure BGP confederations. As with route reflectors, BGP confederations are recommended only for IBGP peering involving many IBGP peering sessions per router. Basically, when you configure BGP confederations, you break the AS into smaller sub-AS, and to those outside your network, the confederations appear as one AS.
PAGE 202
• history entry — an entry that stores information on a downed route • dampened path — a path that is no longer advertised • penalized path — a path that is assigned a penalty To configure route flap dampening parameters, set dampening parameters using a route map, clear information on route dampening and return suppressed routes to active state, view statistics on route flapping, or change the path selection from the default mode (deterministic) to non-deterministic, use the following commands.
PAGE 203
show ip bgp flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] – ip-address [mask]: enter the IP address and mask. – filter-list as-path-name: enter the name of an AS-PATH ACL. – regexp regular-expression: enter a regular express to match on. • By default, the path selection in Dell Networking OS is deterministic, that is, paths are compared irrespective of the order of their arrival.
PAGE 204
Dampening enabled. 0 history paths, 0 dampened paths, 0 penalized paths Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer 10.114.8.34 18508 82883 79977 780266 10.114.8.33 18508 117265 25069 780266 Dell> InQ OutQ Up/Down State/PfxRcd 0 2 00:38:51 118904 0 20 00:38:50 102759 To view which routes are dampened (non-active), use the show ip bgp dampened-routes command in EXEC Privilege mode. Changing BGP Timers To configure BGP timers, use either or both of the following commands.
PAGE 205
To reset a BGP connection using BGP soft reconfiguration, use the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode at the system prompt. When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are reevaluated. With this command, the replay and update process is triggered only if a route-refresh request is not negotiated with the peer.
PAGE 206
Route Map Continue The BGP route map continue feature, continue [sequence-number], (in ROUTE-MAP mode) allows movement from one route-map entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number). If you do not specify a sequence number, the continue feature moves to the next sequence number (also known as an “implied continue”). If a match clause exists, the continue feature executes only after a successful match occurs. If there are no successful matches, continue is ignored.
PAGE 207
• When exchanging updates with the peer, BGP sends and receives IPv4 multicast routes if the peer is marked as supporting that AFI/SAFI. • Exchange of IPv4 multicast route information occurs through the use of two new attributes called MP_REACH_NLRI and MP_UNREACH_NLRI, for feasible and withdrawn routes, respectively. • If the peer has not been activated in any AFI/SAFI, the peer remains in Idle state.
PAGE 208
EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] notifications [in | out] View information about BGP updates and filter by prefix name. EXEC Privilege mode • debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] updates [in | out] [prefix-list name] Enable soft-reconfiguration debug.
PAGE 209
Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1395, neighbor version 1394 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), 0 withdrawn by peer Prefixes advertised 0, rejected 0, 0 withdrawn from peer Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:12, due to Missing well known attribute Notification History 'UPDATE error/Missing well-known attr' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Rec
PAGE 210
00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0181a1e4 0181a25c 41af92c0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 0181a1e4 0181a25c 41af9400 00000000 PDU[2] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[3] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[4] : len 19, captured 00:34:22 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 [. . .] Outgoing packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.
PAGE 211
Sample Configurations The following example configurations show how to enable BGP and set up some peer groups. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, you can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Be sure that you make the necessary changes. The following illustration shows the configurations described on the following examples.
PAGE 212
no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 1/21 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/21 ip address 10.0.1.21/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#int te 1/31 R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#ip address 10.0.3.31/24 R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/31 ip address 10.0.3.31/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#router bgp 99 R1(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.128.
PAGE 213
R2(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.128.0/24 R2(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.1 remote 99 R2(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.1 update-source loop 0 R2(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote 100 R2(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 update loop 0 R2(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 bgp router-id 192.168.128.2 network 192.168.128.
PAGE 214
R1(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.3 peer-group BBB R1(conf-router_bgp)# R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor BBB peer-group neighbor BBB no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 peer-group AAA neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.128.3 peer-group BBB neighbor 192.168.128.
PAGE 215
Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 2) R2#conf R2(conf)#router bgp 99 R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CC no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor BBB peer-group R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor BBB no shutdown R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 peer AAA R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.1 no shut R2(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.
PAGE 216
BGP-RIB over all using 207 bytes of memory 2 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 128 bytes of memory 2 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 90 bytes of memory 2 neighbor(s) using 9216 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 192.168.128.1 99 93 99 1 0 (0) 00:00:15 1 192.168.128.2 99 122 120 1 0 (0) 00:00:11 1 R3#show ip bgp neighbor BGP neighbor is 192.168.128.1, remote AS 99, external link Member of peer-group BBB for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 192.168.
PAGE 217
Content Addressable Memory (CAM) 9 Content addressable memory (CAM) is supported on the S6000 platform. CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 and Layer 3 forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. CAM Allocation The user configurable CAM allocations feature is available on the S6000 platform.
PAGE 218
CAM Allocation Setting Openflow 0 fedgovacl 0 The following additional CAM allocation settings are supported on the S6000, S4810 or S4820T platforms only. Table 9. Additional Default CAM Allocation Settings Additional CAM Allocation Setting FCoE ACL (fcoeacl) 0 ISCSI Opt ACL (iscsioptacl) 0 The ipv6acl and vman-dual-qos allocations must be entered as a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10). All other profile allocations can use either even or odd numbered ranges.
PAGE 219
Dell(conf)# 1. Select a cam-acl action. CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl [default | l2acl] NOTE: Selecting default resets the CAM entries to the default settings. Select l2acl to allocate the desired space for all other regions. 2. Enter the number of FP blocks for each region.
PAGE 220
View CAM Profiles To view the current CAM profile for the chassis and each component, use the show cam-profile command. This command also shows the profile that is loaded after the next chassis or component reload.
PAGE 221
L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) Next Boot(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 4 Ipv4Acl : 4 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 2 L2Qos : 1 1 L2PT : 0 0 IpMacAcl : 0 0 VmanQos : 0 0 VmanDualQos : 0 0 EcfmAcl : 0 0 FcoeAcl : 0 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 0 ipv4pbr : 0 2 vrfv4Acl : 0 2 Openflow : 0 0 fedgovacl : 0 0 Dell
PAGE 222
fedgovacl : 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 -- Stack unit 7 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr
PAGE 223
| | | | | | | | Codes: * - cam usage Dell# IN-L2 ACL OUT-L3 ACL OUT-V6 ACL OUT-L2 ACL is above 90%. | | | | 768 158 158 206 | | | | 0 5 0 7 | | | | 768 153 158 199 CAM Optimization CAM optimization is supported on the S6000 platform. When you enable this command, if a Policy Map containing classification rules (ACL and/or dscp/ ipprecedence rules) is applied to more than one physical interface on the same port-pipe, only a single copy of the policy is written (only 1 FP entry is used).
PAGE 224
If you exceed the QoS CAM space, follow these steps. 1. Verify that you have configured a CAM profile that allocates 24 K entries to the IPv4 system flow region. 2. Allocate more entries in the IPv4Flow region to QoS. Dell Networking OS supports the ability to view the actual CAM usage before applying a service-policy. The test cam-usage service-policy command provides this test framework. For more information, refer to Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space.
PAGE 225
Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 10 Control plane policing (CoPP) is supported on the S6000 platform. Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
PAGE 226
Figure 26. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing For example, border gateway protocol (BGP) and internet control message protocol (ICMP) share same queue (Q6); Q6 has 400 PPS of bandwidth by default. The desired rate of ICMP is 100 PPS and the remaining 300 PPS is assigned to BGP. If ICMP packets come at 400 PPS, BGP packets may be dropped though ICMP packets are rate-limited to 100 PPS.
PAGE 227
CoPP policies are configured by creating extended ACL rules and specifying rate-limits through QoS policies. The ACLs and QoS policies are assigned as service-policies. Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS).
PAGE 228
Examples of Configuring CoPP for Different Protocols The following example shows creating the IP/IPv6/MAC extended ACL.
PAGE 229
The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell(conf)#control-plane-cpuqos Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#service-policy rate-limit-protocols egressFP_rate_policy Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#exit Configuring CoPP for CPU Queues Controlling traffic on the CPU queues does not require ACL rules, but does require QoS policies. CoPP for CPU queues converts the input rate from kbps to pps, assuming 64 bytes is the average packet size, and applies that rate to the corresponding queue.
PAGE 230
The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell#conf Dell(conf)#control-plane Dell(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy Show Commands The following section describes the CoPP show commands. To view the rates for each queue, use the show cpu-queue rate cp command.
PAGE 231
GVRP STP ISIS 01:80:c2:00:00:21 01:80:c2:00:00:00 01:80:c2:00:00:14/15 09:00:2b:00:00:04/05 any any any any Q7 Q7 Q7 Q7 CP CP CP CP _ _ _ Dell# To view the queue mapping for IPv6 protocols, use the show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping command.
PAGE 232
11 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) is supported on the S6000 platform. NOTE: Ethernet Enhancements in Data Center Bridging The following section describes DCB. The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: FCoE_DCB_Config and iSCSI_DCB_Config. These files are located in the root directory flash:/CONFIG_TEMPLATE. After copying the configuration files to the startup config and reloading the system.
PAGE 233
network that may drop packets in case of network congestion. IP networks rely on transport protocols (for example, TCP) for reliable data transmission with the associated cost of greater processing overhead and performance impact. Storage traffic Storage traffic based on Fibre Channel media uses the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) protocol for data transfer. This traffic typically consists of large data packets with a payload of 2K bytes that cannot recover from frame loss.
PAGE 234
The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: • FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. • iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: • PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface. However, only two lossless queues are supported on an interface: one for FCoE converged traffic with priority 3 and one for iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4.
PAGE 235
• PFC uses DCB MIB IEEE 802.1azd2.5 and PFC MIB IEEE 802.1bb-d2.2. • PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface. However, only two lossless queues are supported on an interface: one for Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) converged traffic and one for Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) storage traffic. Configure the same lossless queues on all ports.
PAGE 236
Table 10. ETS Traffic Groupings Traffic Groupings Description Priority group A group of 802.1p priorities used for bandwidth allocation and queue scheduling. All 802.1p priority traffic in a group must have the same traffic handling requirements for latency and frame loss. Group ID A 4-bit identifier assigned to each priority group. The range is from 0 to 7 configurable; 8 - 14 reservation and 15.0 - 15.7 is strict priority group..
PAGE 237
Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol (DCBx) The data center bridging exchange (DCBx) protocol is disabled by default on the S4810; ETS is also disabled. DCBx allows a switch to automatically discover DCB-enabled peers and exchange configuration information. PFC and ETS use DCBx to exchange and negotiate parameters with peer devices. DCBx capabilities include: • Discovery of DCB capabilities on peer-device connections. • Determination of possible mismatch in DCB configuration on a peer link.
PAGE 238
Enabling Data Center Bridging DCB is automatically configured when you configure FCoE or iSCSI optimization. Data center bridging supports converged enhanced Ethernet (CEE) in a data center network. DCB is disabled by default. It must be enabled to support CEE. • Priority-based flow control • Enhanced transmission selection • Data center bridging exchange protocol • FCoE initialization protocol (FIP) snooping DCB processes virtual local area network (VLAN)-tagged packets and dot1p priority values.
PAGE 239
NOTE: Dell Networking does not recommend mapping all ingress traffic to a single queue when using PFC and ETS. However, Dell Networking does recommend using Ingress traffic classification using the service-class dynamic dot1p command (honor dot1p) on all DCB-enabled interfaces.
PAGE 240
fpStatsPerPgTa ble This table fetches the Allocated Min cells, Shared cells and Headroom cells per Priority Group, the mode in which the buffer cells are allocated - Static or Dynamic and the Used Min Cells, Shared cells and Headroom cells per Priority Group. The table fetches a value of 0 if the mode of allocation is Static and a value of 1 if the mode of allocation is Dynamic. This table is indexed by stack-unit number, port number and priority group number.
PAGE 241
3. Configure the CoS traffic to be stopped for the specified delay. DCB INPUT POLICY mode pfc priority priority-range Enter the 802.1p values of the frames to be paused. The range is from 0 to 7. The default is none. Maximum number of loss less queues supported on the switch: 2. Separate priority values with a comma. Specify a priority range with a dash, for example: pfc priority 1,3,5-7. 4.
PAGE 242
To remove a DCB input policy, including the PFC configuration it contains, use the no dcb-input policy-name command in INTERFACE Configuration mode. To disable PFC operation on an interface, use the no pfc mode on command in DCB Input Policy Configuration mode. PFC is enabled and disabled as the global DCB operation is enabled (dcb enable) or disabled (no dcb enable). You can enable any number of 802.1p priorities for PFC. Queues to which PFC priority traffic is mapped are lossless by default.
PAGE 243
Lossless traffic egresses out the no-drop queues. Ingress dot1p traffic from PFC-enabled interfaces is automatically mapped to the no-drop egress queues. 1. Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot/port 2. Configure the port queues that will still function as no-drop queues for lossless traffic. INTERFACE mode pfc no-drop queues queue-range For the dot1p-queue assignments, refer to the dot1p Priority-Queue Assignment table.
PAGE 244
You can configure the size of the PFC buffer for all switches in a stack or all port pipes on a specified stack unit by entering the following commands on the master switch. • Configure the PFC buffer for all switches in the stack. CONFIGURATION mode [no] dcb stack-unit all pfc-buffering pfc-port {1-64} pfc-queues {1-2} • By default, the PFC buffer is enabled on all ports on the stack unit.
PAGE 245
4. Apply the DCB output policy to an interface. ETS Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure ETS bandwidth allocation or queue scheduling and apply a DCB output policy on an interface. • Configuring ETS bandwidth allocation or a queue scheduler for dot1p priorities in a priority group is applicable if the DCBx version used on a port is CIN (refer to Configuring DCBx).
PAGE 246
3. (Optional) Configure the bandwidth percentage allocated to priority traffic in port queues. POLICY-MAP-OUT-ETS mode bandwidth-percentage percentage The percentage range is from 1 to 100% in units of 1%. The sum of bandwidth percentage assigned to dot1p priorities/queues in a priority group should be 100%. The default is none. NOTE: If you configure bandwidth allocation, you cannot configure a scheduling method in Step 2. 4. Exit DCB Output Policy Configuration mode.
PAGE 247
DCB output-policy error: If an error occurs in an DCB output-policy configuration, the configuration is ignored and the scheduler and bandwidth allocation settings are reset to the ETS default values (all priorities are in the same ETS priority group and bandwidth is allocated equally to each priority). If an error occurs when a port receives a peer’s ETS configuration, the port’s configuration is reset to the previously configured DCB output policy.
PAGE 248
By default, all 802.1p priorities are grouped in priority group 0 and 100% of the port bandwidth is assigned to priority group 0. The complete bandwidth is equally assigned to each priority class so that each class has 12 to 13%. The maximum number of priority groups supported in ETS output policies on an interface is equal to the number of data queues (4) on the port. The 802.1p priorities in a priority group can map to multiple queues.
PAGE 249
8. Apply the output policy with the ETS configuration to an egress interface. INTERFACE mode dcb-policy output policy-name Dell Networking OS Behavior: Create a DCB output policy to associate a priority group with an ETS output policy with scheduling and bandwidth configuration. You can apply a DCB output policy on multiple egress ports. The ETS configuration associated with 802.1p priority traffic in a DCB output policy is used in DCBx negotiation with ETS peers.
PAGE 250
If you configure only the priority group in an ETS output policy or only the dot1p priority for strictpriority scheduling, the flow is handled with group strict priority. Configuring Bandwidth Allocation for DCBx CIN After you apply an ETS output policy to an interface, if the DCBx version used in your data center network is CIN, you may need to configure a QoS output policy to overwrite the default CIN bandwidth allocation.
PAGE 251
CONFIGURATION mode dcb-policy input stack-unit {all | stack-unit-id} stack-ports all dcb-inputpolicy-name Entering this command removes all DCB input policies applied to stacked ports. A dcb-policy input stack-unit all command overwrites any previous dcb-policy input stack-unit stack-unit-id configurations. Similarly, a dcb-policy input stack-unit stackunit-id command overwrites any previous dcb-policy input stack-unit all configuration.
PAGE 252
Prerequisite: For DCBx, enable LLDP on all DCB devices. DCBx Operation DCBx performs the following operations: • Discovers DCB configuration (such as PFC and ETS) in a peer device. • Detects DCB mis-configuration in a peer device; that is, when DCB features are not compatibly configured on a peer device and the local switch. Mis-configuration detection is feature-specific because some DCB features support asymmetric configuration.
PAGE 253
When an auto-downstream port receives and overwrites its configuration with internally propagated information, one of the following actions is taken: • If the peer configuration received is compatible with the internally propagated port configuration, the link with the DCBx peer is enabled.
PAGE 254
NOTE: On a DCBx port, application priority TLV advertisements are handled as follows: • The application priority TLV is transmitted only if the priorities in the advertisement match the configured PFC priorities on the port. • On auto-upstream and auto-downstream ports: – If a configuration source is elected, the ports send an application priority TLV based on the application priority TLV received on the configuration-source port.
PAGE 255
A newly elected configuration source propagates configuration changes received from a peer to the other auto-configuration ports. Ports receiving auto-configuration information from the configuration source ignore their current settings and use the configuration source information. Propagation of DCB Information When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer, the port acts as a DCBx client and checks if a DCBx configuration source exists on the switch.
PAGE 256
Behavior of Tagged Packets The below is example for enabling PFC for priority 2 for tagged packets. Priority (Packet Dot1p) 2 will be mapped to PG6 on PRIO2PG setting. All other Priorities for which PFC is not enabled are mapped to default PG – PG7. Classification rules on ingress (Ingress FP CAM region) matches incoming packet-dot1p and assigns an internal priority (to select queue as per Table 1 and Table 2).
PAGE 257
Table 11. Internal- 0 priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 2 0 3 4 5 6 7 1 policy-map-input policy-dscp-based-pfc service-queue 0 class-map dscp-pfc-1 service-queue 1 class-map dscp-pfc-2 3. Dot1p->Queue Mapping Configuration is retained at the default value. Default dot1p-queue mapping is, Dell#show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue :2 0 1 3 4 5 6 4. 7 Interface Configurations on server connected ports. a. Enable DCB globally. Dell(conf)#dcb enable b.
PAGE 258
Figure 29. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: • For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
PAGE 259
4. Configure ports to operate in a manual role. 1. Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot/port 2. Enter LLDP Configuration mode to enable DCBx operation. INTERFACE mode [no] protocol lldp 3. Configure the DCBx version used on the interface, where: auto configures the port to operate using the DCBx version received from a peer. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.5} • cee: configures the port to use CEE (Intel 1.01).
PAGE 260
5. On manual ports only: Configure the PFC and ETS TLVs advertised to DCBx peers. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] advertise DCBx-tlv {ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc} [ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc] [ets-conf | ets-reco | pfc] • ets-conf: enables the advertisement of ETS Configuration TLVs. • ets-reco: enables the advertisement of ETS Recommend TLVs. • pfc enables: the advertisement of PFC TLVs. The default is All PFC and ETS TLVs are advertised.
PAGE 261
3. Configure the DCBx version used on all interfaces not already configured to exchange DCB information. PROTOCL LLDP mode [no] DCBx version {auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.5} • auto: configures all ports to operate using the DCBx version received from a peer. • cee: configures a port to use CEE (Intel 1.01). cin configures a port to use Cisco-Intel-Nuova (DCBx 1.0). • ieee-v2.5: configures a port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5). The default is Auto.
PAGE 262
6. Configure the FCoE priority advertised for the FCoE protocol in Application Priority TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] fcoe priority-bits priority-bitmap The priority-bitmap range is from 1 to FF. The default is 0x8. 7. Configure the iSCSI priority advertised for the iSCSI protocol in Application Priority TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] iscsi priority-bits priority-bitmap The priority-bitmap range is from 1 to FF. The default is 0x10.
PAGE 263
– fail: enables traces for DCBx failures. – mgmt: enables traces for DCBx management frames. – resource: enables traces for DCBx system resource frames. – sem: enables traces for the DCBx state machine. – tlv: enables traces for DCBx TLVs. Verifying the DCB Configuration To display DCB configurations, use the following show commands. Table 12. Displaying DCB Configurations Command Output show dot1p-queue mapping Displays the current 802.1p priority-queue mapping.
PAGE 264
Command Output show stack-unit {0-11 | all} stack ports all ets details Displays the ETS configuration applied to ingress traffic on stack-links, including priorities and link delay. Examples of the show Commands The following example shows the show dot1p-queue mapping command. Dell(conf)# show dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue : 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 3 The following example shows the show dcb command.
PAGE 265
FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 Dell# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/49 pfc detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/49 Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is enabled Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is recommended PFC DCBx Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 p
PAGE 266
Fields Description Port state for current operational PFC configuration: • • • Init: Local PFC configuration parameters were exchanged with peer. Recommend: Remote PFC configuration parameters were received from peer. Internally propagated: PFC configuration parameters were received from configuration source. PFC DCBx Oper status Operational status for exchange of PFC configuration on local port: match (up) or mismatch (down).
PAGE 267
Fields Description PFC TLV Statistics: Pause Rx pkts Number of PFC pause frames received The following example shows the show interface pfc statistics command. Dell#show interfaces te 0/0 pfc statistics Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 Priority Received PFC Frames Transmitted PFC Frames -------- ------------------- ---------------------0 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 6 0 0 7 0 0 The following example shows the show interface ets summary command.
PAGE 268
Oper status is init ETS DCBx Oper status is Down State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 1955 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Reco TLV Pkts, 1955 Output Reco TLV Pkts, 0 Error Reco TLV Pkts Dell(conf)# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/0 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters : -----------------Admin is enabled T
PAGE 269
Traffic Class Pkts The following example shows the show interface ets detail command.
PAGE 270
Traffic Class TLV Pkts The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields. Table 14. show interface ets detail Command Description Field Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number. Max Supported TC Group Maximum number of priority groups supported. Number of Traffic Classes Number of 802.1p priorities currently configured. Admin mode ETS mode: on or off.
PAGE 271
Field Description Conf TLV Tx Status Status of ETS Configuration TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled. ETS TLV Statistic: Input Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs received. ETS TLV Statistic: Output Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs transmitted. ETS TLV Statistic: Error Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Error Configuration TLVs received. The following example shows the show stack-unit all stack-ports all pfc details command.
PAGE 272
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% - ETS - The following example shows the show interface DCBx detail command (IEEE).
PAGE 273
Local DCBx Status ----------------DCBx Operational Version is 0 DCBx Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 1 Acknowledgment Number: 1 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBx Status: ---------------DCBx Operational Version is 0 DCBx Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 1 Acknowledgment Number: 1 Total DCBx Frames transmitted 994 Total DCBx Frames received 646 Total DCBx Frame errors 0 Total DCBx Frames unrecognized 0 The following table describes the show interface DCBx detail command fields.
PAGE 274
Field Description Local DCBx Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Acknowledgment Number Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Protocol State Current operational state of DCBx protocol: ACK or IN-SYNC. Peer DCBx Status: DCBx Operational Version DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs received from peer device.
PAGE 275
The packets that come in with packet-dot1p 2 alone will use Q1 (as per dot1p to Queue classification – Table 2) on the egress port. • When Peer sends a PFC message for Priority 2, based on above PRIO2COS table (TABLE 2), Queue 1 is halted. • Queue 1 starts buffering the packets with Dot1p 2. This causes PG6 buffer counter to increase on the ingress, since P-dot1p 2 is mapped to PG6. • As the PG6 watermark threshold is reached, PFC will be generated for dot1p 2.
PAGE 276
Table 17. Dot1p to Queue Mapping PacketDot1p 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 PFC and ETS Configuration Examples This section contains examples of how to configure and apply DCB input and output policies on an interface. Using PFC and ETS to Manage Data Center Traffic The following shows examples of using PFC and ETS to manage your data center traffic. In the following example: • Incoming SAN traffic is configured for priority-based flow control.
PAGE 277
Figure 30. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
PAGE 278
dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Priority Group Assignment 3 SAN 4 IPC 5 LAN 6 LAN 7 LAN The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic.
PAGE 279
Dell(conf-qos-policy-out)# exit Dell(conf)# qos-policy-output ipc ets Dell(conf-qos-policy-out)# bandwidth-percentage 5 Dell(conf-qos-policy-out)# exit Example of Configuring a DCB Output Policy to Apply ETS (Bandwidth Allocation and Scheduling) to IPC, SAN, and LAN Priority Traffic Dell(conf)# dcb-output ets Dell(conf-dcb-out)# priority-group san qos-policy san Dell(conf-dcb-out)# priority-group lan qos-policy lan Dell(conf-dcb-out)# priority-group ipc qos-policy ipc Example of Applying DCB Input and Outpu
PAGE 280
In this example, the configured ETS bandwidth allocation and scheduler behavior is as follows: Unused bandwidth usage: Strict-priority groups: Normally, if there is no traffic or unused bandwidth for a priority group, the bandwidth allocated to the group is distributed to the other priority groups according to the bandwidth percentage allocated to each group.
PAGE 281
Step Task Command Command Mode priority-pgid dot1p0_group_num dot1p1_group_num dot1p2_group_num dot1p3_group_num dot1p4_group_num dot1p5_group_num dot1p6_group_num dot1p7_group_num DCB MAP priority groups is made available and allocated according to the specified percentages. If a priority group does not use its allocated bandwidth, the unused bandwidth is made available to other priority groups.
PAGE 282
Step Task Command Command Mode 1 Enter interface configuration mode on an Ethernet port. CONFIGURATION interface {tengigabitEthernet slot/ port | fortygigabitEthernet slot/port} 2 Apply the DCB map on the Ethernet port to configure it with the PFC and ETS settings in the map; for example: dcb-map name INTERFACE Dell# interface tengigabitEthernet 0/0 Dell(config-if-te-0/0)# dcb-map SAN_A_dcb_map1 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to apply a DCB map to more than one port.
PAGE 283
Configuring Lossless Queues DCB also supports the manual configuration of lossless queues on an interface after you disable PFC mode in a DCB map and apply the map on the interface. The configuration of no-drop queues provides flexibility for ports on which PFC is not needed, but lossless traffic should egress from the interface. Lossless traffic egresses out the no-drop queues. Ingress 802.1p traffic from PFC-enabled peers is automatically mapped to the no-drop egress queues.
PAGE 284
Data Center Bridging: Default Configuration This functionality is supported on the S6000 platform. Before you configure PFC and ETS on an S6000 switch (see Configuring DCB Maps and its Attributes), take into account the following default settings: DCB is enabled. The PFC memory buffer supports up to 52 (not 64) PFC-enabled ports and two lossless queues per port. PFC and ETS are globally enabled by default.
PAGE 285
As soon as you apply a DCB map with PFC enabled on an interface, DCBx starts exchanging information with a peer. The IEEE802.1Qbb, CEE and CIN versions of PFC TLV are supported. DCBx also validates PFC configurations that are received in TLVs from peer devices. By applying a DCB map with PFC enabled, you enable PFC operations on ingress port traffic. To achieve complete lossless handling of traffic, configure PFC priorities on all DCB egress ports.
PAGE 286
ETS Configuration Notes ETS provides a way to optimize bandwidth allocation to outbound 802.1p classes of converged Ethernet traffic. Different traffic types have different service needs. Using ETS, you can create groups within an 802.1p priority class to configure different treatment for traffics with different bandwidth, latency, and best-effort needs.
PAGE 287
The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure ETS bandwidth allocation or strictpriority queuing in a DCB map: • When allocating bandwidth or configuring strict-priority queuing for dot1p priorities in a priority group on a DCBx CIN interface, take into account the CIN bandwidth allocation (see Configuring Bandwidth Allocation for DCBx CIN) and dot1p-queue mapping.
PAGE 288
Dynamic ingress buffering enables the sending of pause frames at different thresholds based on the number of ports that experience congestion at a time. This behavior impacts the total buffer size used by a particular lossless priority on an interface. The pause and resume thresholds can also be configured dynamically.
PAGE 289
Configure the dcb-buffer-threshold command and its related parameters only on ports with either auto configuration or dcb-map configuration. This command is not supported on existing front-panel interfaces or stack ports that are configured with the dcb-input or dcb-output commands. Similarly, if the dcb-buffer-threshold configuration is present on a stack port or any interface, the dcb-input or dcbouput policies cannot be applied on those interfaces.
PAGE 290
Configuring the Dynamic Buffer Method Priority-based flow control using dynamic buffer spaces is supported on the S6000 platform. To configure the dynamic buffer capability, perform the following steps: 1. Enable the DCB application. By default, DCB is enabled and link-level flow control is disabled on all interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode S6000-109-Dell(conf)#dcb enable 2. Configure the shared PFC buffer size and the total buffer size. A maximum of 4 lossless queues are supported.
PAGE 291
8. Create a QoS policy buffer and enter the QoS Policy Buffer Configuration mode to configure the nodrop queues, ingress buffer size, buffer limit for pausing, and buffer offset limit for resuming.
PAGE 292
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) 12 Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is available on the S6000 platform. DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
PAGE 293
Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
PAGE 294
Option Number and Description Identifiers a user-defined string used by the Relay Agent to forward DHCP client packets to a specific server. L2 DHCP Snooping Option 82 User Port Stacking Option 230 Specifies IP addresses for DHCP messages received from the client that are to be monitored to build a DHCP snooping database. Set the stacking option variable to provide DHCP server stack-port detail when the DHCP offer is set. End Option 255 Signals the last option in the DHCP packet.
PAGE 295
Figure 32. Client and Server Messaging Implementation Information The following describes DHCP implementation. • Dell Networking implements DHCP based on RFC 2131 and RFC 3046. • IP source address validation is a sub-feature of DHCP Snooping; the Dell Networking OS uses access control lists (ACLs) internally to implement this feature and as such, you cannot apply ACLs to an interface which has IP source address validation.
PAGE 296
Configure the System to be a DHCP Server Configuring the system to be a DHCP server is supported only on the S6000 platform. A DHCP server is a network device that has been programmed to provide network configuration parameters to clients upon request. Servers typically serve many clients, making host management much more organized and efficient. The following table lists the key responsibilities of DHCP servers. Table 18.
PAGE 297
3. Specify the range of IP addresses from which the DHCP server may assign addresses. DHCP mode network network/prefix-length • network: the subnet address. • prefix-length: specifies the number of bits used for the network portion of the address you specify. The prefix-length range is from 17 to 31. 4. Display the current pool configuration. DHCP mode show config After an IP address is leased to a client, only that client may release the address.
PAGE 298
lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite} The default is 24 hours. Specifying a Default Gateway The IP address of the default router should be on the same subnet as the client. To specify a default gateway, follow this step. • Specify default gateway(s) for the clients on the subnet, in order of preference.
PAGE 299
Creating Manual Binding Entries An address binding is a mapping between the IP address and the media access control (MAC) address of a client. The DHCP server assigns the client an available IP address automatically, and then creates an entry in the binding table. However, the administrator can manually create an entry for a client; manual bindings are useful when you want to guarantee that a particular network device receives a particular IP address.
PAGE 300
Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server. Implement the DHCP client functionality as follows: • The switch can obtain a dynamically assigned IP address from a DHCP server. A start-up configuration is not received. Use bare metal provisioning (BMP) to receive configuration parameters (Dell Networking OS version and a configuration file). BMP is enabled as a factory-default setting on a switch.
PAGE 301
• Release the IP address dynamically acquired from a DHCP server from the interface. • Disable the DHCP client on the interface so it cannot acquire a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server. • Stop DHCP packet transactions on the interface. When you enter the release dhcp command, the IP address dynamically acquired from a DHCP server is released from an interface. The ability to acquire a new DHCP server-assigned address remains in the running configuration for the interface.
PAGE 302
• To display statistics about DHCP client interfaces, use the show ip dhcp client statistics interface type slot/port command. • To clear DHCP client statistics on a specified or on all interfaces, use the clear ip dhcp client statistics {all | interface type slot/port} command. • To display dynamic IP address lease information currently assigned to a DHCP client interface, use the show ip dhcp lease [interface type slot/port] command.
PAGE 303
Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) A DHCP client is not supported on VLT interfaces. VLAN and Port Channels DHCP client configuration and behavior are the same on Virtual LAN (VLAN) and port-channel (LAG) interfaces as on a physical interface.
PAGE 304
The received stacking configuration is always applied on the master stack unit. option #230 "unit-number:3#priority:2#stack-group:14" Configure Secure DHCP The following feature is available on the platform, except where noted. DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks.
PAGE 305
ip dhcp relay information-option remote-id DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping protects networks from spoofing. In the context of DHCP snooping, ports are either trusted or not trusted. By default, all ports are not trusted. Trusted ports are ports through which attackers cannot connect. Manually configure ports connected to legitimate servers and relay agents as trusted.
PAGE 306
3. Enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp snooping vlan name Adding a Static Entry in the Binding Table To add a static entry in the binding table, use the following command. • Add a static entry in the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode ip dhcp snooping binding mac Clearing the Binding Table To clear the binding table, use the following command. • Delete all of the entries in the binding table.
PAGE 307
Drop DHCP Packets on Snooped VLANs Only Binding table entries are deleted when a lease expires or the relay agent encounters a DHCPRELEASE. Line cards maintain a list of snooped VLANs. When the binding table fills, DHCP packets are dropped only on snooped VLANs, while such packets are forwarded across non-snooped VLANs. Because DHCP packets are dropped, no new IP address assignments are made. However, DHCP release and decline packets are allowed so that the DHCP snooping table can decrease in size.
PAGE 308
MAC flooding An attacker can send fraudulent ARP messages to the gateway until the ARP cache is exhausted, after which, traffic from the gateway is broadcast. Denial of service An attacker can send a fraudulent ARP messages to a client to associate a false MAC address with the gateway address, which would blackhole all internet-bound packets from the client. NOTE: Dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) uses entries in the L2SysFlow CAM region, a sub-region of SystemFlow.
PAGE 309
To see how many valid and invalid ARP packets have been processed, use the show arp inspection statistics command. Dell#show arp inspection statistics Dynamic ARP Inspection (DAI) Statistics --------------------------------------Valid ARP Requests : 0 Valid ARP Replies : 1000 Invalid ARP Requests : 1000 Invalid ARP Replies : 0 Dell# Bypassing the ARP Inspection You can configure a port to skip ARP inspection by defining the interface as trusted, which is useful in multi-switch environments.
PAGE 310
The DHCP binding table associates addresses the DHCP servers assign, with the port on which the requesting client is attached. When you enable IP source address validation on a port, the system verifies that the source IP address is one that is associated with the incoming port. If an attacker is impostering as a legitimate client, the source address appears on the wrong ingress port and the system drops the packet.
PAGE 311
4. Enable IP+MAC SAV. INTERFACE mode ip dhcp source-address-validation ipmac Dell Networking OS creates an ACL entry for each IP+MAC address pair in the binding table and applies it to the interface. To display the IP+MAC ACL for an interface for the entire system, use the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation [interface] command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 312
13 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) is supported on theS6000 platform. ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity is available on theplatform. Flow-based affinity includes the following: • Link Bundle Monitoring Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features.
PAGE 313
CONFIGURATION mode. ipv6 ecmp-deterministic Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
PAGE 314
NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when the user configures multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indexes are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only. For link bundle monitoring with ECMP, the ecmp-group command is used to enable the link bundle monitoring feature. The ecmp-group with id 2, enabled for link bundle monitoring is user configured.
PAGE 315
Creating an ECMP Group Bundle Within each ECMP group, you can specify an interface. If you enable monitoring for the ECMP group, the utilization calculation is performed when the average utilization of the link-bundle (as opposed to a single link within the bundle) exceeds 60%. 1. Create a user-defined ECMP group bundle. CONFIGURATION mode ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. 2. Add interfaces to the ECMP group bundle.
PAGE 316
Dell(conf-ecmp-group-5)#show config ! ecmp-group 5 interface tengigabitethernet 0/2 interface tengigabitethernet 0/3 link-bundle-monitor enable Dell(conf-ecmp-group-5)# Support for /128 IPv6 and /32 IPv4 Prefixes in Layer 3 Host Table and LPM Table IPv6 enhancements utilize the capability on S6000 platform to program /128 IPv6 prefixes in LPM table and /32 IPv4 prefixes in Host table. Also host table provides ECMP support for destination prefixes in the hardware.
PAGE 317
The following is the portion of the example output from Release 9.3(0.1): Neighbor Mac-Addr ------------------------------------[ 132] 20::1 00:00:20:d5:ec:a0 [ 132] 20::1 00:00:20:d5:ec:a1 Port Vid EC ------------------------Fo 0/116 0 1 Fo 0/114 0 1 Support for moving /128 IPv6 Prefixes and /32 IPv4 Prefixes The software supports a command to program IPv6 /128 route prefixes in the route table. You can define IPv6 /128 route prefixes in the route table using the ipv6 unicast-host-routecommand.
PAGE 318
14 FCoE Transit The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on the switch on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
PAGE 319
FIP provides functionality for discovering and logging into an FCF. After discovering and logging in, FIP allows FCoE traffic to be sent and received between FCoE end-devices (ENodes) and the FCF. FIP uses its own EtherType and frame format. The following illustration shows the communication that occurs between an ENode server and an FCoE switch (FCF). The following table lists the FIP functions. Table 20.
PAGE 320
Figure 33. FIP Discovery and Login Between an ENode and an FCF FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges In a converged Ethernet network, intermediate Ethernet bridges can snoop on FIP packets during the login process on an FCF. Then, using ACLs, a transit bridge can permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. An Ethernet bridge that provides these functions is called a FIP snooping bridge (FSB).
PAGE 321
FCoEgenerated ACLs These take precedence over user-configured ACLs. A user-configured ACL entry cannot deny FCoE and FIP snooping frames. The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge in a converged Ethernet network. The top-of-rack (ToR) switch operates as an FCF for FCoE traffic. Converged LAN and SAN traffic is transmitted between the ToR switch and an switch.
PAGE 322
The following sections describe how to configure the FIP snooping feature on a switch that functions as a FIP snooping bridge so that it can perform the following functions: • Allocate CAM resources for FCoE. • Perform FIP snooping (allowing and parsing FIP frames) globally on all VLANs or on a per-VLAN basis. • To assign a MAC address to an FCoE end-device (server ENode or storage device) after a server successfully logs in, set the FCoE MAC address prefix (FC-MAP) value an FCF uses.
PAGE 323
For VLAN membership, you must: • create the VLANs on the switch which handles FCoE traffic (use the interface vlan command). • configure each FIP snooping port to operate in Hybrid mode so that it accepts both tagged and untagged VLAN frames (use the portmode hybrid command). • configure tagged VLAN membership on each FIP snooping port that sends and receives FCoE traffic and has links with an FCF, ENode server, or another FIP snooping bridge (use the tagged port-type slot/port command).
PAGE 324
Enable FIP Snooping on VLANs You can enable FIP snooping globally on a switch on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. When you enable FIP snooping on VLANs: • FIP frames are allowed to pass through the switch on the enabled VLANs and are processed to generate FIP snooping ACLs. • FCoE traffic is allowed on VLANs only after a successful virtual-link initialization (fabric login FLOGI) between an ENode and an FCF. All other FCoE traffic is dropped.
PAGE 325
Table 21. Impact of Enabling FIP Snooping Impact Description MAC address learning MAC address learning is not performed on FIP and FCoE frames, which are denied by ACLs dynamically created by FIP snooping on serverfacing ports in ENode mode. MTU auto-configuration MTU size is set to mini-jumbo (2500 bytes) when a port is in Switchport mode, the FIP snooping feature is enabled on the switch, and FIP snooping is enabled on all or individual VLANs.
PAGE 326
To enable FCoE transit on the switch and configure the FCoE transit parameters on ports, follow these steps. 1. Configure FCoE. FCoE configuration: copy flash:/ CONFIG_TEMPLATE/ FCoE_DCB_Config running-config The configuration files are stored in the flash memory in the CONFIG_TEMPLATE file. NOTE: DCB/DCBx is enabled when either of these configurations is applied. 2. Save the configuration on the switch. EXEC Privilege mode. write memory 3. Reload the switch to enable the configuration.
PAGE 327
Command Output name (WWNN) and the worldwide port name (WWPN). show fip-snooping config Displays the FIP snooping status and configured FC-MAP values. show fip-snooping enode [enode-macaddress] Displays information on the ENodes in FIPsnooped sessions, including the ENode interface and MAC address, FCF MAC address, VLAN ID and FC-ID.
PAGE 328
Table 23. show fip-snooping sessions Command Description Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode . ENode Interface Slot/ port number of the interface connected to the ENode. FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. FCF Interface Slot/ port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FCoE MAC MAC address of the FCoE session assigned by the FCF. FC-ID Fibre Channel ID assigned by the FCF. Port WWPN Worldwide port name of the CNA port.
PAGE 329
The following example shows the show fip-snooping fcf command. Dell# show fip-snooping fcf FCF MAC FCF Interface VLAN FC-MAP FKA_ADV_PERIOD No. of Enodes ------------------- ---- ------------------- ------------54:7f:ee:37:34:40 Po 22 100 0e:fc:00 4000 2 The following table describes the show fip-snooping fcf command fields. Table 25. show fip-snooping fcf Command Description Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. FCF Interface Slot/port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected.
PAGE 330
Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number Number of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of of FLOGI FDISC FLOGO Enode Keep Alive VN Port Keep Alive Multicast Discovery Advertisement Unicast Discovery Advertisement FLOGI Accepts FLOGI Rejects FDISC Accepts FDISC Rejects FLOGO Accepts FLOGO Rejects CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :1 :16 :0 :4416 :3136 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0
PAGE 331
Field Description Number of FLOGI Number of FIP-snooped FLOGI request frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Number of FIP-snooped FDISC request frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGO Number of FIP-snooped FLOGO frames received on the interface. Number of ENode Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped ENode keep-alive frames received on the interface. Number of VN Port Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped VN port keep-alive frames received on the interface.
PAGE 332
The following example shows the show fip-snooping vlan command. Dell# show fip-snooping vlan * = Default VLAN VLAN ---*1 100 FC-MAP -----0X0EFC00 FCFs ---1 Enodes -----2 Sessions -------17 FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows an S4810 switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 35.
PAGE 333
Example of Enabling the FIP Snooping Feature on the Switch (FIP Snooping Bridge) Dell(conf)# feature fip-snooping Example of Enabling FIP Snooping on the FCoE VLAN Dell(conf)# interface vlan 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-10)# fip-snooping enable Example of Enabling an FC-MAP Value on a VLAN Dell(conf-if-vl-10)# fip-snooping fc-map 0xOEFC01 NOTE: Configuring an FC-MAP value is only required if you do not use the default FC-MAP value (0x0EFC00).
PAGE 334
Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up 15 This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Flex Hash Capability Overview This functionality is supported on the S6000 platform. The flex hash functionality enables you to configure a packet search key and matches packets based on the search key. When a packet matches the search key, two 16-bit hash fields are extracted from the start of the L4 header and provided as inputs (bins 2 and 3) for RTAG7 hash computation.
PAGE 335
of the L4 header and provided as inputs (bins 2 and 3) for RTAG7 hash computation. You must specify the offset of hash fields from the start of the L4 header, which contains a flow identification field. 1. In Dell Networking OS Release 9.3(0.0), you can enable bins 2 and 3 by using the load-balance ingress-port enable command in Global Configuration mode. To configure the flex hash functionality, you must enable these bins.
PAGE 336
Optimizing the Boot Time This functionality is supported on the S6000 platform. You can reduce the booting time of an S6000 switch by using the fast boot feature. With the reduced time that is taken to reboot the switch, upon a manually-initiated reload or an expected restart of the device, there is minimal disruption in the traffic that is managed by the switch.
PAGE 337
the ND cache entries from becoming stale and being removed while the ToR goes through a CPU reset. This timer can be restored to its prior value after the ToR has completed its planned reload. 4. The BGP protocol on the adjacent devices responds to network (link-state) changes and route advertisements quickly and propagates these further up the network quickly. You might need to adjust the BGP timers on these devices. 5.
PAGE 338
After the Dell Networking OS image is loaded and activated, and the appropriate software components come up, the following additional actions are performed: • If a database of dynamic ARP entries is present on the flash drive, that information is read and the ARP entries are restored; the entries are installed on the switch as soon as possible. At the same time, the entries are changed to an initial (“aged out”) state so that they are refreshed (and flushed if not learnt again).
PAGE 339
• The system delays sending the BGP End-of-RIB notification to peers with whom BGP GR has been negotiated to ensure that the local routes of the system are advertised to the peers, if required by the configuration. • If BGP GR is enabled on any peering session, the timeout values used for the BGP hold timer do not take effect.
PAGE 340
• A combination of the previous two conditions One possible impact of this behavior change is that if the amount of traffic to a destination is higher than the volume of traffic that can be carried over one path, a portion of that traffic might be dropped for a short duration (30-60 seconds) after the system comes up. Delayed Installation of ECMP Routes Into BGP The current FIB component of Dell Networking OS has some inherent inefficiencies when handling a large number of ECMP routes (i.e.
PAGE 341
RDMA is a technology that a virtual machine (VM) uses to directly transfer information to the memory of another VM, thus enabling VMs to be connected to storage networks. With RoCE, RDMA enables data to be forwarded without passing through the CPU and the main memory path of TCP/IP. In a deployment that contains both the RoCE network and the normal IP network on two different networks, RRoCE combines the RoCE and the IP networks and sends the RoCE frames over the IP network.
PAGE 342
encapsulation, is associated with a physical/Port-channel interface. Normal VLANs and VLAN encapsulation can exist simultaneously and any non-unicast traffic received on a normal VLAN is not flooded using lite subinterfaces whose encapsulation VLAN ID matches with that of the normal VLAN ID. You can use the encapsulation dot1q vlan-id command in INTERFACE mode to configure lite subinterfaces.
PAGE 343
16 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) Force10 resilient ring protocol (FRRP) is supported on the S6000 platform. FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses.
PAGE 344
The Member VLAN is the VLAN used to transmit data as described earlier. The Control VLAN is used to perform the health checks on the ring. The Control VLAN can always pass through all ports in the ring, including the secondary port of the Master node. Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure.
PAGE 345
Multiple FRRP Rings Up to 255 rings are allowed per system and multiple rings can be run on one system. More than the recommended number of rings may cause interface instability. You can configure multiple rings with a single switch connection; a single ring can have multiple FRRP groups; multiple rings can be connected with a common link. Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch A member VLAN can span two rings interconnected by a common switch, in a figure-eight style topology.
PAGE 346
Concept Explanation Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent. Control VLANs are used only for sending RHF, and cannot be used for any other purpose. Member VLAN Each ring maintains a list of member VLANs. Member VLANs must be consistent across the entire ring. Port Role Each node has two ports for each ring: Primary and Secondary. The Master node Primary port generates RHFs. The Master node Secondary port receives the RHFs.
PAGE 347
Concept Explanation There is no periodic transmission of TCRHFs. The TCRHFs are sent on triggered events of ring failure or ring restoration only. Implementing FRRP • FRRP is media and speed independent. • FRRP is a Dell proprietary protocol that does not interoperate with any other vendor. • You must disable the spanning tree protocol (STP) on both the Primary and Secondary interfaces before you can enable FRRP. • All ring ports must be Layer 2 ports.
PAGE 348
Configuring the Control VLAN Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as control or member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to Layer 2. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports.
PAGE 349
3. Assign the Primary and Secondary ports and the control VLAN for the ports on the ring. CONFIG-FRRP mode. interface primary int slot/port secondary int slot/port control-vlan vlan id Interface: • For a 10/100/1000 Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 350
To create the Members VLANs for this FRRP group, use the following commands on all of the Transit switches in the ring. 1. Create a VLAN with this ID number. CONFIGURATION mode. interface vlan vlan-id VLAN ID: the range is from 1 to 4094. 2. Tag the specified interface or range of interfaces to this VLAN. CONFIG-INT-VLAN mode. tagged interface slot/port {range} Interface: • Slot/Port, range: Slot and Port ID for the interface. The range is entered Slot/Port-Port.
PAGE 351
5. Identify the Member VLANs for this FRRP group. CONFIG-FRRP mode. member-vlan vlan-id {range} VLAN-ID, Range: VLAN IDs for the ring’s Member VLANs. 6. Enable this FRRP group on this switch. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode.
PAGE 352
• Show the information for the identified FRRP group. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp ring-id • Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • • • • • • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN.
PAGE 353
protocol frrp 101 interface primary GigabitEthernet 1/24 secondary GigabitEthernet 1/34 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode master no disable Example of R2 TRANSIT interface GigabitEthernet 2/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary GigabitEtherne
PAGE 354
mode transit no disable 354 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP)
PAGE 355
17 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) GARP VLAN registration protocol (GVRP) is supported on the S6000 platform. Typical virtual local area network (VLAN) implementation involves manually configuring each Layer 2 switch that participates in a given VLAN. GVRP, defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and de-register attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
PAGE 356
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-by-switch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, that type of port is referred to as a VLAN trunk port, but it is not necessary to specifically identify to the Dell Networking OS that the port is a trunk port. Figure 36.
PAGE 357
• Configure a GARP Timer Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch. CONFIGURATION mode gvrp enable Example of Configuring GVRP Dell(conf)#protocol gvrp Dell(config-gvrp)#no disable Dell(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable Dell(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command.
PAGE 358
not be unconfigured when it receives a Leave PDU. Therefore, the registration mode on that interface is FIXED. • Forbidden Mode — Disables the port to dynamically register VLANs and to propagate VLAN information except information about VLAN 1. A port with forbidden registration type thus allows only VLAN 1 to pass through even though the PDU carries information for more VLANs.
PAGE 359
LeaveAll Timer Dell(conf)# 5000 Dell Networking OS displays this message if an attempt is made to configure an invalid GARP timer: Dell(conf)#garp timers join 300 % Error: Leave timer should be >= 3*Join timer.
PAGE 360
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 18 Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is supported on the S6000 platform. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. IGMP is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group.
PAGE 361
Figure 37. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1. One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicastsystems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet. 2.
PAGE 362
response, the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet. IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2. However, there are differences. • Version 3 adds the ability to filter by multicast source, which helps multicast routing protocols avoid forwarding traffic to subnets where there are no interested receivers.
PAGE 363
Figure 39. IGMP Version 3–Capable Multicast Routers Address Structure Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1. The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2. The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1.
PAGE 364
Figure 40. Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1. Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary. 2.
PAGE 365
Figure 41. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1. Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2. Enable a multicast routing protocol.
PAGE 366
• Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes • Designating a Multicast Router Interface Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. • View IGMP-enabled interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface Example of the show ip igmp interface Command Dell#show ip igmp interface gig 7/16 GigabitEthernet 7/16 is up, line protocol is up Internet address is 10.87.3.
PAGE 367
IGMP version is 3 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/13)# Viewing IGMP Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP groups, use the following command. • View both learned and statically configured IGMP groups. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups Example of the show ip igmp groups Command Dell(conf-if-gi-1/0)#do sho ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Uptime 224.1.1.1 GigabitEthernet 1/0 00:00:03 224.1.2.
PAGE 368
INTERFACE mode • ip igmp query-interval Adjust the maximum response time. INTERFACE mode • ip igmp query-max-resp-time Adjust the last member query interval. INTERFACE mode ip igmp last-member-query-interval Adjusting the IGMP Querier Timeout Value If there is more than one multicast router on a subnet, only one is elected to be the querier, which is the router that sends queries to the subnet. 1. Routers send queries to the all multicast systems address, 224.0.0.1.
PAGE 369
Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value). Then, after no response, it removes the group from the outgoing interface for the subnet. IGMP immediate leave reduces leave latency by enabling a router to immediately delete the group membership on an interface after receiving a Leave message (it does not send any group-specific or group-and-source queries before deleting the entry).
PAGE 370
• View the configuration. CONFIGURATION mode • show running-config Disable snooping on a VLAN.
PAGE 371
• Configure the switch to only forward unregistered packets to ports on a VLAN that are connected to mrouter ports. CONFIGURATION mode no ip igmp snooping flood Specifying a Port as Connected to a Multicast Router To statically specify or view a port in a VLAN, use the following commands. • Statically specify a port in a VLAN as connected to a multicast router. INTERFACE VLAN mode • ip igmp snooping mrouter View the ports that are connected to multicast routers. EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 372
ip igmp snooping last-member-query-interval Fast Convergence after MSTP Topology Changes The following describes the fast convergence feature. When a port transitions to the Forwarding state as a result of an STP or MSTP topology change, Dell Networking OS sends a general query out of all ports except the multicast router ports. The host sends a response to the general query and the forwarding database is updated without having to wait for the query interval to expire.
PAGE 373
routes. If SSH is specified as a management application, SSH links to and from an unknown destination uses the management default route. Protocol Separation When you configure the application application-type command to configure a set of management applications with TCP/UDP port numbers to the OS, the following table describes the association between applications and their port numbers. Table 27.
PAGE 374
can configure two default routes, one configured on the management port and the other on the frontend port. Two tables, namely, Egress Interface Selection routing table and default routing table, are maintained. In the preceding table, the columns Client and Server indicate that the applications can act as both a client and a server within the switch. The Management Egress Interface Selection table contains all management routes (connected, static and default route).
PAGE 375
When the feature is disabled using the no management egress-interface-selection command, the following operations are performed: • All management application configuration is removed. • All routes installed in the management EIS routing table are removed. Handling of Management Route Configuration When the EIS feature is enabled, the following processing occurs: • All existing management routes (connected, static and default) are duplicated and added to the management EIS routing table.
PAGE 376
the show management application pkt-drop-cntr command. This counter is cleared using clear management application pkt-drop-cntr command. • Packets whose destination TCP/UDP port does not match a configured management application, take the regular route lookup flow in the IP stack. • In the ARP layer, for all ARP packets received through the management interface, a double route lookup is done, one in the default routing table and another in the management EIS routing table.
PAGE 377
traffic for such end-user-originated sessions destined to management port ip1 is handled using the EIS route lookup. Handling of Transit Traffic (Traffic Separation) This is forwarded traffic where destination IP is not an IP address configured in the switch. • Packets received on the management port with destination on the front-end port is dropped. • Packets received on the front-end port with destination on the management port is dropped. • A separate drop counter is incremented for this case.
PAGE 378
This phenomenon occurs where traffic is transiting the switch. Traffic has not originated from the switch and is not terminating on the switch. • Drop the packets that are received on the front-end data port with destination on the management port. • Drop the packets that received on the management port with destination as the front-end data port. Switch-Destined Traffic This phenomenon occurs where traffic is terminated on the switch.
PAGE 379
Protocol Behavior when EIS is Enabled Behavior when EIS is Disabled dns EIS Behavior Default Behavior ftp EIS Behavior Default Behavior ntp EIS Behavior Default Behavior radius EIS Behavior Default Behavior Sflow-collector Default Behavior Snmp (SNMP Mib response and SNMP Traps) EIS Behavior Default Behavior ssh EIS Behavior Default Behavior syslog EIS Behavior Default Behavior tacacs EIS Behavior Default Behavior telnet EIS Behavior Default Behavior tftp EIS Behavior Defau
PAGE 380
Default Behavior: Route lookup is done in the default routing table and appropriate egress port is selected.
PAGE 381
Designating a Multicast Router Interface To designate an interface as a multicast router interface, use the following command. Dell Networking OS also has the capability of listening in on the incoming IGMP general queries and designate those interfaces as the multicast router interface when the frames have a non-zero IP source address. All IGMP control packets and IP multicast data traffic originating from receivers is forwarded to multicast router interfaces.
PAGE 382
Interfaces 19 This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell Networking Operating System (OS). • 10 Gigabit Ethernet / 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are supported on the S6000 platform.
PAGE 383
Interface Types The following table describes different interface types.
PAGE 384
Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:05:f3:6a Current address is 00:01:e8:05:f3:6a Pluggable media present, XFP type is 10GBASE-LR. Medium is MultiRate, Wavelength is 1310nm XFP receive power reading is -3.7685 Interface index is 67436603 Internet address is 65.113.24.
PAGE 385
interface GigabitEthernet 9/7 no ip address shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 9/8 no ip address shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 9/9 no ip address shutdown Enabling a Physical Interface After determining the type of physical interfaces available, to enable and configure the interfaces, enter INTERFACE mode by using the interface interface slot/port command. 1. Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information.
PAGE 386
Configuration Task List for Physical Interfaces By default, all interfaces are operationally disabled and traffic does not pass through them.
PAGE 387
Type of Interface Possible Modes Requires Creation Default State 10/100/1000 Ethernet, 10 Gigabit Ethernet Layer 2 No Shutdown (disabled) Management N/A No Shutdown (disabled) Loopback Layer 3 Yes No shutdown (enabled) Null interface N/A No Enabled Port Channel Layer 2 Yes Shutdown (disabled) Yes, except for the default VLAN.
PAGE 388
For information about enabling and configuring the Spanning Tree Protocol, refer to Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode, use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode When you assign an IP address to a physical interface, you place it in Layer 3 mode. To enable Layer 3 mode on an individual interface, use the following commands.
PAGE 389
The ip-address must be in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D) and the mask must be in slash format (/ xx). Add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. Example of the show ip interface Command You can only configure one primary IP address per interface. You can configure up to 255 secondary IP addresses on a single interface.
PAGE 390
Configuring EIS EIS is compatible with the following protocols: DNS, FTP, NTP, RADIUS, sFlow, SNMP, SSH, Syslog, TACACS, Telnet, and TFTP. To enable and configure EIS, use the following commands: 1. Enter EIS mode. CONFIGURATION mode management egress-interface-selection 2. Configure which applications uses EIS.
PAGE 391
Configuring Management Interfaces on the S-Series You can manage the S-Series from any port. To configure an IP address for the port, use the following commands. There is no separate management routing table, so configure all routes in the IP routing table (the ip route command). • Configure an IP address. INTERFACE mode • ip address Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode • no shutdown The interface is the management interface.
PAGE 392
NOTE: To monitor VLAN interfaces, use Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based internets: MIB-II (RFC 1213). NOTE: You cannot simultaneously use egress rate shaping and ingress rate policing on the same VLAN. Dell Networking OS supports Inter-VLAN routing (Layer 3 routing in VLANs). You can add IP addresses to VLANs and use them in routing protocols in the same manner that physical interfaces are used.
PAGE 393
• View Loopback interface configurations. EXEC mode • show interface loopback number Delete a Loopback interface. CONFIGURATION mode no interface loopback number Many of the same commands found in the physical interface are also found in the Loopback interfaces. Null Interfaces The Null interface is another virtual interface. There is only one Null interface. It is always up, but no traffic is transmitted through this interface. To enter INTERFACE mode of the Null interface, use the following command.
PAGE 394
Port Channel Benefits A port channel interface provides many benefits, including easy management, link redundancy, and sharing. Port channels are transparent to network configurations and can be modified and managed as one interface. For example, you configure one IP address for the group and that IP address is used for all routed traffic on the port channel. With this feature, you can create larger-capacity interfaces by utilizing a group of lower-speed links.
PAGE 395
configuration becomes the common speed of the port channel. If the other interfaces configured in that port channel are configured with a different speed, Dell Networking OS disables them.
PAGE 396
You can configure a port channel as you would a physical interface by enabling or configuring protocols or assigning access control lists. Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel The physical interfaces in a port channel can be on any line card in the chassis, but must be the same physical type.
PAGE 397
Dell# Gi 13/8 (Up) Gi 13/13 (Up) Gi 13/14 (Up) The following example shows the port channel’s mode (L2 for Layer 2 and L3 for Layer 3 and L2L3 for a Layer 2-port channel assigned to a routed VLAN), the status, and the number of interfaces belonging to the port channel. Dell>show interface port-channel 20 Port-channel 20 is up, line protocol is up Hardware address is 00:01:e8:01:46:fa Internet address is 1.1.120.
PAGE 398
Reassigning an Interface to a New Port Channel An interface can be a member of only one port channel. If the interface is a member of a port channel, remove it from the first port channel and then add it to the second port channel. Each time you add or remove a channel member from a port channel, Dell Networking OS recalculates the hash algorithm for the port channel. To reassign an interface to a new port channel, use the following commands. 1. Remove the interface from the first port channel.
PAGE 399
Example of Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel Dell#config t Dell(conf)#int po 1 Dell(conf-if-po-1)#minimum-links 5 Dell(conf-if-po-1)# Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces To configure and verify VLAN tags for individual members of a port channel, perform the following: 1. Configure VLAN membership on individual ports INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-te-0/2)#vlan tagged 2,3-4 2.
PAGE 400
– secondary: the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. Deleting or Disabling a Port Channel To delete or disable a port channel, use the following commands. • Delete a port channel. CONFIGURATION mode • no interface portchannel channel-number Disable a port channel. shutdown When you disable a port channel, all interfaces within the port channel are operationally down also.
PAGE 401
– ip-selection [dest-ip | source-ip] — Distribute IP traffic based on the IP destination or source address. – mac [dest-mac | source-dest-mac | source-mac] — Distribute IPV4 traffic based on the destination or source MAC address, or both, along with the VLAN, Ethertype, source module ID and source port ID. – tcp-udp enable — Distribute traffic based on the TCP/UDP source and destination ports. – ingress-port — Option to Source Port Id for ECMP/ LAG hashing.
PAGE 402
The hash-algorithm command is specific to ECMP group. The default ECMP hash configuration is crclower. This command takes the lower 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port.
PAGE 403
Bulk Configuration Examples Use the interface range command for bulk configuration. • Create a Single-Range • Create a Multiple-Range • Exclude Duplicate Entries • Exclude a Smaller Port Range • Overlap Port Ranges • Commas • Add Ranges Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range.
PAGE 404
Overlap Port Ranges The following is an example showing how the interface-range prompt extends a port range from the smallest start port number to the largest end port number when port ranges overlap. handles overlapping port ranges.
PAGE 405
Choosing an Interface-Range Macro To use an interface-range macro, use the following command. • Selects the interfaces range to be configured using the values saved in a named interface-range macro. CONFIGURATION mode interface range macro name Example of Using a Macro to Change the Interface Range Configuration Mode The following example shows how to change to the interface-range configuration mode using the interface-range macro named “test.
PAGE 406
Traffic statistics: Current Input bytes: 0 Output bytes: 0 Input packets: 0 Output packets: 0 64B packets: 0 Over 64B packets: 0 Over 127B packets: 0 Over 255B packets: 0 Over 511B packets: 0 Over 1023B packets: 0 Error statistics: Input underruns: 0 Input giants: 0 Input throttles: 0 Input CRC: 0 Input IP checksum: 0 Input overrun: 0 Output underruns: 0 Output throttles: 0 m l T q - Change mode Page up Increase refresh interval Quit Rate 0 Bps 0 Bps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 pps 0 0 0
PAGE 407
To test and display TDR results, use the following commands. 1. To test for cable faults on the GigabitEthernet cable. EXEC Privilege mode tdr-cable-test gigabitethernet / Between two ports, do not start the test on both ends of the cable. Enable the interface before starting the test. Enable the port to run the test or the test prints an error message. 2. Displays TDR test results.
PAGE 408
• The system must be reloaded after issuing the CLI for the change to take effect. Link Dampening Interface state changes occur when interfaces are administratively brought up or down or if an interface state changes. Every time an interface changes a state or flaps, routing protocols are notified of the status of the routes that are affected by the change in state. These protocols go through the momentous task of reconverging.
PAGE 409
To view dampening information on all or specific dampened interfaces, use the show interfaces dampening command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell# show interfaces dampening InterfaceStateFlapsPenaltyHalf-LifeReuseSuppressMax-Sup Gi 0/0Up005750250020 Gi 0/1Up21200205001500300 Gi 0/2Down4850306002000120 To view a dampening summary for the entire system, use the show interfaces dampening summary command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell# show interfaces dampening summary 20 interfaces are configured with dampening.
PAGE 410
Transmission Media MTU Range (in bytes) Ethernet 594-12000 = link MTU 576-9234 = IP MTU Link Bundle Monitoring Link bundle monitoring is supported only on the platform. Monitoring linked LAG bundles allows traffic distribution amounts in a link to be monitored for unfair distribution at any given time. A threshold of 60% is defined as an acceptable amount of traffic on a member link. Links are monitored in 15-second intervals for three consecutive instances.
PAGE 411
Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on Ethernet interfaces. The default is rx off tx off. INTERFACE mode. flowcontrol rx [off | on] tx [off | on] Where: rx on: Processes the received flow control frames on this port. rx off: Ignores the received flow control frames on this port. tx on: Sends control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received.
PAGE 412
The flow control sender and receiver must be on the same port-pipe. Flow control is not supported across different port-pipes. To enable pause frames, use the following command. • Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on 1 and 10Gig line cards. INTERFACE mode flowcontrol rx [off | on] tx [off | on] [threshold {<1-2047> <1-2013> <1-2013>}] – rx on: enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port.
PAGE 413
• All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value. • The port channel link MTU and IP MTU must be less than or equal to the link MTU and IP MTU values configured on the channel members. For example, if the members have a link MTU of 2100 and an IP MTU 2000, the port channel’s MTU values cannot be higher than 2100 for link MTU or 2000 bytes for IP MTU. VLANs: • All members of a VLAN must have the same IP MTU value. • Members can have different Link MTU values.
PAGE 414
Setting the Speed and Duplex Mode of Ethernet Interfaces To discover whether the remote and local interface requires manual speed synchronization, and to manually synchronize them if necessary, use the following command sequence. 1. Determine the local interface status. Refer to the following example. EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces [interface | linecard slot-number] status 2. Determine the remote interface status.
PAGE 415
Gi 0/3 Down Gi 0/4 Force10Port Up Gi 0/5 Down Gi 0/6 Down Gi 0/7 Up Gi 0/8 Down Gi 0/9 Down Gi 0/10 Down Gi 0/11 Down Gi 0/12 Down [output omitted] Auto 1000 Mbit Auto Auto 1000 Mbit Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto -30-130 --1502,1504,1506-1508,1602 ------ In the previous example, several ports display “Auto” in the Speed field, including port 0/1. In the following example, the speed of port 0/1 is set to 100Mb and then its auto-negotiation is disabled.
PAGE 416
• Change the default interval between keepalive messages. INTERFACE mode • keepalive [seconds] View the new setting. INTERFACE mode show config View Advanced Interface Information The following options have been implemented for the show [ip | running-config] interfaces commands for (only) stack-unit interfaces. When you use the configured keyword, only interfaces that have non-default configurations are displayed.
PAGE 417
Configuring the Interface Sampling Size Although you can enter any value between 30 and 299 seconds (the default), software polling is done once every 15 seconds. So, for example, if you enter “19”, you actually get a sample of the past 15 seconds. All LAG members inherit the rate interval configuration from the LAG. The following example shows how to configure rate interval when changing the default value.
PAGE 418
0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns Output 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 100 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec, 0 packets/sec, 0.
PAGE 419
– For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. – For the management interface on the RPM, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. The slot range is from 0 to 1. The port range is 0. – For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet then the slot/ port information. – For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 420
The compressed configuration will group all the similar looking configuration thereby reducing the size of the configuration.
PAGE 421
shutdown no shutdown ! ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/10 interface group Vlan 3 – 5 no ip address tagged te 0/0 shutdown no ip address ! shutdown interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/34 ! ip address 2.1.1.1/16 interface Vlan 1000 shutdown ip address 1.1.1.1/16 ! no shutdown interface Vlan 2 ! no ip address no shutdown Compressed config size – 27 lines.
PAGE 422
no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shutdown Uncompressed config size – 52 lines write memory compressed The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode. In stacking scenario, it will also take care of syncing it to all the standby and member units.
PAGE 423
IPv4 Routing 20 IPv4 routing is supported on the S6000 platform. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell Networking OS.
PAGE 424
• • • Assigning IP Addresses to an Interface (mandatory) Configuring Static Routes (optional) Configure Static Routes for the Management Interface (optional) For a complete listing of all commands related to IP addressing, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide.
PAGE 425
interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown ! Dell(conf-if)# Dell(conf-if)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown ! Dell(conf-if)# Configuring Static Routes A static route is an IP address that you manually configure and that the routing protocol does not learn, such as open shortest path first (OSPF). Often, static routes are used as backup routes in case other dynamically learned routes are unreachable.
PAGE 426
S 6.1.2.4/32 S 6.1.2.5/32 S 6.1.2.6/32 S 6.1.2.7/32 S 6.1.2.8/32 S 6.1.2.9/32 S 6.1.2.10/32 S 6.1.2.11/32 S 6.1.2.12/32 S 6.1.2.13/32 S 6.1.2.14/32 S 6.1.2.15/32 S 6.1.2.16/32 S 6.1.2.17/32 S 11.1.1.0/24 Direct, Lo 0 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.
PAGE 427
S S S S S S S S S S S S S 6.1.2.6/32 6.1.2.7/32 6.1.2.8/32 6.1.2.9/32 6.1.2.10/32 6.1.2.11/32 6.1.2.12/32 6.1.2.13/32 6.1.2.14/32 6.1.2.15/32 6.1.2.16/32 6.1.2.17/32 11.1.1.0/24 --More-- via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.2, via 6.1.20.
PAGE 428
You can set this duration or interval for which the TCP connection waits to be established to a significantly high value to prevent the device from moving into an out-of-service condition or becoming unresponsive during a SYN flood attack that occurs on the device. You can set the wait time to be 10 seconds or lower.
PAGE 429
Enabling Dynamic Resolution of Host Names By default, dynamic resolution of host names (DNS) is disabled. To enable DNS, use the following commands. • Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode • ip domain-lookup Specify up to six name servers. CONFIGURATION mode ip name-server ip-address [ip-address2 ... ip-address6] The order you entered the servers determines the order of their use. Example of the show hosts Command To view current bindings, use the show hosts command.
PAGE 430
ip domain-list name Configure this command up to six times to specify a list of possible domain names. Dell Networking OS searches the domain names in the order they were configured until a match is found or the list is exhausted. Configuring DNS with Traceroute To configure your switch to perform DNS with traceroute, use the following commands. • Enable dynamic resolution of host names. CONFIGURATION mode • ip domain-lookup Specify up to six name servers.
PAGE 431
ARP Dell Networking OS uses two forms of address resolution: address resolution protocol (ARP) and Proxy ARP. ARP runs over Ethernet and enables endstations to learn the MAC addresses of neighbors on an IP network. Over time, Dell Networking OS creates a forwarding table mapping the MAC addresses to their corresponding IP address. This table is called the ARP Cache and dynamically learned addresses are removed after a defined period of time.
PAGE 432
Example of the show arp Command These entries do not age and can only be removed manually. To remove a static ARP entry, use the no arp ip-address command. To view the static entries in the ARP cache, use the show arp static command in EXEC privilege mode. Dell#show arp Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Internet 10.1.2.
PAGE 433
– For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. NOTE: Transit traffic may not be forwarded during the period when deleted ARP entries are resolved again and re-installed in CAM. Use this option with extreme caution. ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Gratuitous ARP can mean an ARP request or reply. In the context of ARP learning via gratuitous ARP on Dell Networking OS, the gratuitous ARP is a request.
PAGE 434
Figure 42. ARP Learning via ARP Request Beginning with Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0, when you enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system installs a new ARP entry, or updates an existing entry for all received ARP requests. Figure 43. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP.
PAGE 435
• The range is from 1 to 20. Set the exponential timer for resending unresolved ARPs. CONFIGURATION mode arp backoff-time The default is 30. • The range is from 1 to 3600. Display all ARP entries learned via gratuitous ARP. EXEC Privilege mode show arp retries ICMP For diagnostics, the internet control message protocol (ICMP) provides routing information to end stations by choosing the best route (ICMP redirect messages) or determining if a router is reachable (ICMP Echo or Echo Reply).
PAGE 436
UDP Helper User datagram protocol (UDP) helper allows you to direct the forwarding IP/UDP broadcast traffic by creating special broadcast addresses and rewriting the destination IP address of packets to match those addresses. Configure UDP Helper Configuring Dell Networking OS to direct UDP broadcast is a two-step process: 1. Enable UDP helper and specify the UDP ports for which traffic is forwarded. Refer to Enabling UDP Helper. 2.
PAGE 437
Configuring a Broadcast Address To configure a broadcast address, use the following command. • Configure a broadcast address on an interface. ip udp-broadcast-address Examples of Configuring and Viewing a Broadcast Address Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 ip address 1.1.0.1/24 ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.
PAGE 438
address to the configured broadcast 1.1.255.255 and routes the packet to VLANs 100 and 101. If you do not configure an IP broadcast address (using the ip udp-broadcast-address command) on VLANs 100 or 101, the packet is forwarded using the original destination IP address 255.255.255.255. Packet 2, sent from a host on VLAN 101 has a broadcast MAC address and IP address. In this case: 1. It is flooded on VLAN 101 without changing the destination address because the forwarding process is Layer 2. 2.
PAGE 439
Figure 45. UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses Incoming packets with a destination IP address matching the configured broadcast address of any interface are forwarded to the matching interfaces. In the following illustration, Packet 1 has a destination IP address that matches the configured broadcast address of VLAN 100 and 101.
PAGE 440
• If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces. Troubleshooting UDP Helper To display debugging information for troubleshooting, use the debug ip udp-helper command.
PAGE 441
IPv6 Routing 21 Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is supported on the S6000 platform. NOTE: The IPv6 basic commands are supported on all platforms. However, not all features are supported on all platforms, nor for all releases. To determine the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) version supporting which features and platforms, refer to Implementing IPv6 with Dell Networking OS. IPv6 is the successor to IPv4.
PAGE 442
NOTE: Dell Networking OS provides the flexibility to add prefixes on Router Advertisements (RA) to advertise responses to Router Solicitations (RS). By default, RA response messages are sent when an RS message is received. Dell Networking OS manipulation of IPv6 stateless autoconfiguration supports the router side only. Neighbor discovery (ND) messages are advertised so the neighbor can use this information to autoconfigure its address. However, received ND messages are not used to create an IPv6 address.
PAGE 443
• Partitioning will be applied well before the system initialization. This will be done using the NVRAM. • Dell Networking OS provides CLI for enabling the partition. Configuration will be stored in NVRAM when the operator saves the configuration. • Partition will take effect only after the switch reboot. During the reboot Dell Networking OS reads the partition configuration from NVRAM and uses the same for partitioning the LPM.
PAGE 444
IPv6 Header Fields The 40 bytes of the IPv6 header are ordered, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 47. IPv6 Header Fields Version (4 bits) The Version field always contains the number 6, referring to the packet’s IP version. Traffic Class (8 bits) The Traffic Class field deals with any data that needs special handling. These bits define the packet priority and are defined by the packet Source. Sending and forwarding routers use this field to identify different IPv6 classes and priorities.
PAGE 445
The following lists the Next Header field values. Value Description 0 Hop-by-Hop option header 4 IPv4 6 TCP 8 Exterior Gateway Protocol (EGP) 41 IPv6 43 Routing header 44 Fragmentation header 50 Encrypted Security 51 Authentication header 59 No Next Header 60 Destinations option header NOTE: This table is not a comprehensive list of Next Header field values. For a complete and current listing, refer to the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) web page at .
PAGE 446
However, if the Destination Address is a Hop-by-Hop options header, the Extension header is examined by every forwarding router along the packet’s route. The Hop-by-Hop options header must immediately follow the IPv6 header, and is noted by the value 0 (zero) in the Next Header field. Extension headers are processed in the order in which they appear in the packet header. Hop-by-Hop Options Header The Hop-by-Hop options header contains information that is examined by every router along the packet’s path.
PAGE 447
of double colons is supported in a single address. Any number of consecutive 0000 groups may be reduced to two colons, as long as there is only one double colon used in an address. Leading and/or trailing zeros in a group can also be omitted (as in ::1 for localhost, 1:: for network addresses and :: for unspecified addresses). All the addresses in the following list are all valid and equivalent.
PAGE 448
Implementing IPv6 with Dell Networking OS Dell Networking OS supports both IPv4 and IPv6 and both may be used simultaneously in your system. The following table lists the Dell Networking OS version in which an IPv6 feature became available for each platform. The sections following the table give greater detail about the feature.
PAGE 449
Feature and Functionality Documentation and Chapter Location S6000 IS-IS for IPv6 8.3.11 Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. IS-IS for IPv6 support for 8.3.11 redistribution Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. ISIS for IPv6 support for distribute lists and administrative distance 8.3.11 OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 8.3.
PAGE 450
Feature and Functionality Documentation and Chapter Location S6000 (outbound SSH) Layer 3 only Secure Shell (SSH) server 8.3.11 support over IPv6 (inbound SSH) Layer 3 only Secure Shell (SSH) Over an IPv6 Transport IPv6 Access Control Lists 8.3.11 IPv6 Access Control Lists in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. N/A IPv6 PIM in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. IPv6 Multicast MLDv1/v2 ICMPv6 ICMPv6 is supported on the S6000 platform.
PAGE 451
Figure 48. Path MTU Discovery Process IPv6 Neighbor Discovery IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol (NDP) is supported on the S6000 platform. NDP is a top-level protocol for neighbor discovery on an IPv6 network. In lieu of address resolution protocol (ARP), NDP uses “Neighbor Solicitation” and “Neighbor Advertisement” ICMPv6 messages for determining relationships between neighboring nodes.
PAGE 452
Figure 49. NDP Router Redirect IPv6 Neighbor Discovery of MTU Packets You can set the MTU advertised through the RA packets to incoming routers, without altering the actual MTU setting on the interface. The ipv6 nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For example, if you set ipv6 nd mtu to 1280, the interface still passes 1500-byte packets, if that is what is set with the mtu command.
PAGE 453
Example for Configuring an IPv6 Recursive DNS Server The following example configures a RDNNS server with an IPv6 address of 1000::1 and a lifetime of 1 second.
PAGE 454
Joined Group address(es): ff02::1 ff02::2 ff02::1:ff00:12 ff02::1:ff8b:7570 ND MTU is 0 ICMP redirects are not sent DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 20120 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated pack
PAGE 455
• Clearing IPv6 Routes Adjusting Your CAM-Profile The cam-acl command is supported on the S6000 platform. Although adjusting your CAM-profile is not a mandatory step, if you plan to implement IPv6 ACLs, adjust your CAM settings. The CAM space is allotted in FP blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. There are 16 FP blocks, but the System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated. You must enter the ipv6acl allocation as a factor of 2 (2, 4, 6, 8, 10).
PAGE 456
You can configure up to two IPv6 addresses on management interfaces, allowing required default router support on the management port that is acting as host, per RFC 4861. Data ports support more than two IPv6 addresses. When you configure IPv6 addresses on multiple interfaces (the ipv6 address command) and verify the configuration (the show ipv6 interfaces command), the same link local (fe80) address is displayed for each IPv6 interface. • Enter the IPv6 Address for the device.
PAGE 457
Configuring Telnet with IPv6 IPv6 telnet is supported on the S6000 platform. The Telnet client and server in Dell Networking OS supports IPv6 connections. You can establish a Telnet session directly to the router using an IPv6 Telnet client, or you can initiate an IPv6 Telnet connection from the router. • Enter the IPv6 Address for the device. EXEC mode or EXEC Privileged mode telnet ipv6 address – ipv6 address: x:x:x:x::x – mask: prefix length is from 0 to 128.
PAGE 458
mroute neighbors ospf pim prefix-list route rpf Dell# IPv6 multicast-routing table IPv6 neighbor information OSPF information PIM V6 information List IPv6 prefix lists IPv6 routing information RPF table Showing an IPv6 Interface To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface.
PAGE 459
ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND retransmit interval is 1000 milliseconds ND hop limit is 64 Showing IPv6 Routes To view the global IPv6 routing information, use the following command. • Show IPv6 routing information for the specified route type. EXEC mode show ipv6 route type The following keywords are available: – To display information about a network, enter ipv6 address (X:X:X:X::X). – To display information about a host, enter hostname.
PAGE 460
C 912::/64 [0/0] Direct, Lo 2, 00:02:33 O IA 999::1/128 [110/2] via fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:3166, Te 0/24, 00:01:30 L fe80::/10 [0/0] Direct, Nu 0, 00:34:42 Dell# The following example shows the show ipv6 route static command.
PAGE 461
– ipv6 address: the format is x:x:x:x::x. – mask: the prefix length is from 0 to 128. NOTE: IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits, where each group is separated by a colon (:). Omitting zeros is accepted as described in Addressing.
PAGE 462
iSCSI Optimization 22 iSCSI optimization is supported on the S6000 platform. This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
PAGE 463
• If you configure flow-control, iSCSI uses the current configuration. If you do not configure flowcontrol, iSCSI auto-configures flow control settings so that receive-only is enabled and transmit-only is disabled. . • iSCSI monitoring sessions — the switch monitors and tracks active iSCSI sessions in connections on the switch, including port information and iSCSI session information. • iSCSI QoS — A user-configured iSCSI class of service (CoS) profile is applied to all iSCSI traffic.
PAGE 464
Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows The switch snoops iSCSI session-establishment and termination packets by installing classifier rules that trap iSCSI protocol packets to the CPU for examination. Devices that initiate iSCSI sessions usually use well-known TCP ports 3260 or 860 to contact targets. When you enable iSCSI optimization, by default the switch identifies IP packets to or from these ports as iSCSI traffic.
PAGE 465
If more than 256 simultaneous sessions are logged continuously, the following message displays indicating the queue rate limit has been reached: %STKUNIT2-M:CP %iSCSI-5-ISCSI_OPT_MAX_SESS_EXCEEDED: New iSCSI Session Ignored: ISID 400001370000 InitiatorName - iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:dt-brcd-cna-2 TargetName iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:4-52aed6-b90d9446c-162466364804fa49-wj-v1 TSIH - 0" NOTE: If you are using EqualLogic or Compellent storage arrays, more than 256 simultaneous iSCSI sessions are possible.
PAGE 466
Configuring Detection and Ports for Dell Compellent Arrays To configure a port connected to a Dell Compellent storage array, use the following command. • Configure a port connected to a Dell Compellent storage array. INTERFACE Configuration mode iscsi profile-compellent The command configures a port for the best iSCSI traffic conditions.
PAGE 467
iSCSI optimization, which can turn on flow control again on reboot, use the no iscsi enable command and save the configuration. When you enable iSCSI on the switch, the following actions occur: • Link-level flow control is globally enabled, if it is not already enabled, and PFC is disabled. • iSCSI session snooping is enabled. • iSCSI LLDP monitoring starts to automatically detect EqualLogic arrays.
PAGE 468
Parameter Default Value iSCSI session monitoring Disabled. The CAM allocation for iSCSI is set to zero (0). iSCSI Optimization Prerequisites The following are iSCSI optimization prerequisites. • iSCSI optimization requires LLDP on the switch. LLDP is enabled by default (refer to Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)). • iSCSI optimization requires configuring two ingress ACL groups The ACL groups are allocated after iSCSI Optimization is configured.
PAGE 469
5. Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload After the switch is reloaded, DCB/ DCBx and iSCSI monitoring are enabled. 6. (Optional) Configure the iSCSI target ports and optionally the IP addresses on which iSCSI communication is monitored. CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi target port tcp-port-1 [tcp-port-2...tcp-port-16] [ip-address address] • tcp-port-n is the TCP port number or a list of TCP port numbers on which the iSCSI target listens to requests.
PAGE 470
8. (Optional) Set the aging time for iSCSI session monitoring. CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi aging time time. The range is from 5 to 43,200 minutes. The default is 10 minutes. 9. (Optional) Configures DCBX to send iSCSI TLV advertisements. LLDP CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE LLDP CONFIGURATION mode [no] advertise dcbx-app-tlv iscsi. You can send iSCSI TLVs either globally or on a specified interface. The interface configuration takes priority over global configuration. The default is Enabled. 10.
PAGE 471
Maximum number of connections is 256 -----------------------------------------------iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports: -----------------------------------------------TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 The following example shows the show iscsi session command. VLT PEER1 Dell#show iscsi session Session 0: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.
PAGE 472
Intermediate System to Intermediate System 23 Intermediate system to intermediate system (Is-IS) is supported on the S6000 platform. • • IS-IS is supported on the S6000 with Dell Networking OS 9.0(2.0). • The IS-IS protocol is an interior gateway protocol (IGP) that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS. • The IS-IS protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
PAGE 473
The NET length is variable, with a maximum of 20 bytes and a minimum of 8 bytes. It is composed of the following: • area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI). • system address — the router’s MAC address. • N-selector — this is always 0. The following illustration is an example of the ISO-style address to show the address format IS-IS uses. In this example, the first five bytes (47.0005.
PAGE 474
Transition Mode All routers in the area or domain must use the same type of IPv6 support, either single-topology or multitopology. A router operating in multi-topology mode does not recognize the ability of the singletopology mode router to support IPv6 traffic, which leads to holes in the IPv6 topology.
PAGE 475
A new TLV (the Restart TLV) is introduced in the IIH PDUs, indicating that the router supports graceful restart. Timers Three timers are used to support IS-IS graceful restart functionality. After you enable graceful restart, these timers manage the graceful restart process. There are three times, T1, T2, and T3. • The T1 timer specifies the wait time before unacknowledged restart requests are generated.
PAGE 476
• Accepts external IPv6 information and advertises this information in the PDUs. The following table lists the default IS-IS values. Table 31.
PAGE 477
Enabling IS-IS By default, IS-IS is not enabled. The system supports one instance of IS-IS. To enable IS-IS globally, create an IS-IS routing process and assign a NET address. To exchange protocol information with neighbors, enable IS-IS on an interface, instead of on a network as with other routing protocols. In IS-IS, neighbors form adjacencies only when they are same IS type. For example, a Level 1 router never forms an adjacency with a Level 2 router.
PAGE 478
4. Enter an IPv4 Address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask Assign an IP address and mask to the interface. The IP address must be on the same subnet as other IS-IS neighbors, but the IP address does not need to relate to the NET address. 5. Enter an IPv6 Address. INTERFACE mode ipv6 address ipv6-address mask • • ipv6 address: x:x:x:x::x mask: The prefix length is from 0 to 128.
PAGE 479
Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# none none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 480
3. Set the minimum interval between SPF calculations. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode spf-interval [level-l | level-2 | interval] [initial_wait_interval [second_wait_interval]] Use this command for IPv6 route computation only when you enable multi-topology. If using singletopology mode, to apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 route computations, use the spf-interval command in CONFIG ROUTER ISIS mode. 4. Implement a wide metric-style globally.
PAGE 481
• – retry-times: number of times an unacknowledged restart request is sent before the restarting router gives up the graceful restart engagement with the neighbor. (The range is from 1 to 10 attempts. The default is 1.) Configure the time for the graceful restart timer T2 that a restarting router uses as the wait time for each database to synchronize.
PAGE 482
Mode: Normal L1-State:NORMAL, L2-State: NORMAL L1: Send/Receive: RR:0/0, RA: 0/0, SA:0/0 T1 time left: 0, retry count left:0 L2: Send/Receive: RR:0/0, RA: 0/0, SA:0/0 T1 time left: 0, retry count left:0 Dell# To view all interfaces configured with IS-IS routing along with the defaults, use the show isis interface command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 483
lsp-refresh-interval seconds – seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535. • The default is 900 seconds. Set the maximum time LSPs lifetime. ROUTER ISIS mode max-lsp-lifetime seconds – seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 1200 seconds. Example of Viewing IS-IS Configuration (ROUTER ISIS Mode) To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode or the show running-config isis command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 484
Metric Style Characteristics Cost Range Supported on IS-IS Interfaces narrow transition Sends narrow (old) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs. 0 to 63 wide transition Sends wide (new) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs. 0 to 16777215 To change the IS-IS metric style of the IS-IS process, use the following command. • Set the metric style for the IS-IS process.
PAGE 485
– default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 if the metric-style is narrow, narrow-transition, or transition. • The range is from 0 to 16777215 if the metric style is wide or wide transition. Assign a metric for an IPv6 link or interface. INTERFACE mode isis ipv6 metric default-metric [level-1 | level-2] – default-metric: the range is from 0 to 63 for narrow and transition metric styles. The range is from 0 to 16777215 for wide metric styles. The default is 10. The default level is level-1.
PAGE 486
• Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2} Example of the show isis database Command to View Level 1-2 Link State Databases To view which IS-type is configured, use the show isis protocol command in EXEC Privilege mode. The show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode displays only non-default information. If you do not change the IS-type, the default value (level-1-2) is not displayed. The default is Level 1-2 router.
PAGE 487
Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or Dell Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table. The prefix lists are globally applied on all interfaces running IS-IS. Configure the prefix list in PREFIX LIST mode prior to assigning it to the IS-IS process.
PAGE 488
Applying IPv6 Routes To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use ROUTER ISIS mode, previously shown. • Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes.
PAGE 489
NOTE: These commands apply to IPv4 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv6 routes, use ADDRESSFAMILY IPV6 mode, shown later. • Include BGP, directly connected, RIP, or user-configured (static) routes in IS-IS. ROUTER ISIS mode redistribute {bgp as-number | connected | rip | static} [level-1 level-1-2 | level-2] [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: – level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level.
PAGE 490
• – map-name: enter the name of a configured route map. Include specific OSPF routes in IS-IS.ROUTER ISIS mode redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric value] [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: – – – – – – – – process-id: the range is from 1 to 65535. level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2.
PAGE 491
Setting the Overload Bit Another use for the overload bit is to prevent other routers from using this router as an intermediate hop in their shortest path first (SPF) calculations. For example, if the IS-IS routing database is out of memory and cannot accept new LSPs, Dell Networking OS sets the overload bit and IS-IS traffic continues to transit the system. To set or remove the overload bit manually, use the following commands. • Set the overload bit in LSPs.
PAGE 492
To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • – interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only. View information about IS-IS local update packets. EXEC Privilege mode debug isis local-updates [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • – interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only.
PAGE 493
• narrow (supports only type, length, and value [TLV] up to 63) • wide (supports TLV up to 16777215) • transition (supports both narrow and wide and uses a TLV up to 63) • narrow transition (accepts both narrow and wide and sends only narrow or old-style TLV) • wide transition (accepts both narrow and wide and sends only wide or new-style TLV) Configure Metric Values For any level (Level-1, Level-2, or Level-1-2), the value range possible in the isis metric command in INTERFACE mode changes depend
PAGE 494
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value NOTE: A truncated value is a value that is higher than 63, but set back to 63 because the higher value is not supported. wide narrow transition default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console.
PAGE 495
Table 34. Metric Value when the Metric Style Changes Multiple Times Beginning Metric Style Next Metric Style Resulting Metric Value Next Metric Style Final Metric Value wide transition truncated value wide original value is recovered wide transition transition truncated value wide transition original value is recovered wide transition truncated value narrow default value (10).
PAGE 496
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition narrow transition truncated value wide transition transition truncated value Sample Configurations The following configurations are examples for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. NOTE: Only one IS-IS process can run on the router, even if both IPv4 and IPv6 routing is being used.
PAGE 497
Figure 52. IPv6 IS-IS Sample Topography IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. Dell(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.
PAGE 498
router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.00 ! address-family ipv6 unicast multi-topology exit-address-family Dell (conf-router_isis)# Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)# Dell (conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
PAGE 499
24 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) Link aggregation control protocol (LACP) is supported on the S6000 platform. Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. The benefits and constraints are basically the same, as described in Port Channel Interfaces in the Interfaces chapter.
PAGE 500
• There is a difference between the shutdown and no interface port-channel commands: – The shutdown command on LAG “xyz” disables the LAG and retains the user commands. However, the system does not allow the channel number “xyz” to be statically created. – The no interface port-channel channel-number command deletes the specified LAG, including a dynamically created LAG. This command removes all LACP-specific commands on the member interfaces.
PAGE 501
• Configure LACP mode. LACP mode [no] port-channel number mode [active | passive | off] – number: cannot statically contain any links. • The default is LACP active. Configure port priority. LACP mode [no] lacp port-priority priority-value The range is from 1 to 65535 (the higher the number, the lower the priority). The default is 32768. LACP Configuration Tasks The following are LACP configuration tasks.
PAGE 502
Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic After creating a LAG, configure the dynamic LAG interfaces. To configure the dynamic LAG interfaces, use the following command. • Configure the dynamic LAG interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode port-channel-protocol lacp Example of the port-channel-protocol lacp Command Dell(conf)#interface Gigabitethernet 3/15 Dell(conf-if-gi-3/15)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-3/15)#port-channel-protocol lacp Dell(conf-if-gi-3/15-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
PAGE 503
Dell(conf-if-po-32)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-32)#lacp long-timeout Dell(conf-if-po-32)#end Dell# show lacp 32 Port-channel 32 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 504
Figure 53. Shared LAG State Tracking To avoid packet loss, redirect traffic through the next lowest-cost link (R3 to R4). Dell Networking OS has the ability to bring LAG 2 down if LAG 1 fails, so that traffic can be redirected. This redirection is what is meant by shared LAG state tracking. To achieve this functionality, you must group LAG 1 and LAG 2 into a single entity, called a failover group. Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking To configure shared LAG state tracking, you configure a failover group.
PAGE 505
As shown in the following illustration, LAGs 1 and 2 are members of a failover group. LAG 1 fails and LAG 2 is brought down after the failure. This effect is logged by Message 1, in which a console message declares both LAGs down at the same time. Figure 54.
PAGE 506
• • If a LAG that is part of a failover group is deleted, the failover group is deleted. If a LAG moves to the Down state due to this feature, its members may still be in the Up state. LACP Basic Configuration Example The screenshots in this section are based on the following example topology. Two routers are named ALPHA and BRAVO, and their hostname prompts reflect those names. Figure 55. LACP Basic Configuration Example Configure a LAG on ALPHA The following example creates a LAG on ALPHA.
PAGE 507
ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:02:11 Queueing strategy: fifo Input statistics: 132 packets, 163668 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts, 12 over 64-byte pkts, 120 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 132 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics 136 packets, 16718 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 15 over 64-byte pkts, 121 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-by
PAGE 508
Figure 57.
PAGE 509
Figure 58.
PAGE 510
interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 no ip address Summary of the LAG Configuration on Bravo Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21)#int port-channel 10 Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no ip add Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int gig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-gi-3/2
PAGE 511
Figure 59.
PAGE 512
Figure 60.
PAGE 513
Figure 61. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
PAGE 514
Layer 2 25 Layer 2 features are supported on the S6000 platform. Manage the MAC Address Table Dell Networking OS provides the following management activities for the MAC address table. • Clearing the MAC Address Table • Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries • Configuring a Static MAC Address • Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command.
PAGE 515
The range is from 10 to 1000000. Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
PAGE 516
interface) before the system verifies that sufficient CAM space exists. If the CAM check fails, a message is displayed: %E90MH:5 %ACL_AGENT-2-ACL_AGENT_LIST_ERROR: Unable to apply access-list MacLimit on GigabitEthernet 5/84 In this case, the configuration is still present in the running-config and show output. Remove the configuration before re-applying a MAC learning limit with a lower value. Also, ensure that you can view the Syslog messages on your session.
PAGE 517
mac learning-limit mac-address-sticky Using sticky MAC addresses allows you to associate a specific port with MAC addresses from trusted devices. If you enable sticky MAC, the specified port retains any dynamically-learned addresses and prevents them from being transferred or learned on other ports. If you configure mac-learning-limit and you enabled sticky MAC, all dynamically-learned addresses are converted to sticky MAC addresses for the selected port.
PAGE 518
no ip address switchport mac learning-limit 1 dynamic no-station-move mac learning-limit station-move-violation log no shutdown Learning Limit Violation Actions Learning limit violation actions are supported only on the S6000 platform. To configure the system to take an action when the MAC learning limit is reached on an interface and a new address is received using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command, use the following commands.
PAGE 519
Recovering from Learning Limit and Station Move Violations After a learning-limit or station-move violation shuts down an interface, you must manually reset it. To reset the learning limit, use the following commands. NOTE: Alternatively, you can reset the interface by shutting it down using the shutdown command and then re-enabling it using the no shutdown command. • Reset interfaces in the ERR_Disabled state caused by a learning limit violation or station move violation.
PAGE 520
When you use NIC teaming, consider that the server MAC address is originally learned on Port 0/1 of the switch (shown in the following) and Port 0/5 is the failover port. When the NIC fails, the system automatically sends an ARP request for the gateway or host NIC to resolve the ARP and refresh the egress interface. When the ARP is resolved, the same MAC address is learned on the same port where the ARP is resolved (in the previous example, this location is Port 0/5 of the switch).
PAGE 521
Apply all other configurations to each interface in the redundant pair such that their configurations are identical, so that transition to the backup interface in the event of a failure is transparent to rest of the network. Figure 64. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command.
PAGE 522
LACP) port-channel interface as either the primary or backup link in a redundant pair with a physical interface. To ensure that existing network applications see no difference when a primary interface in a redundant pair transitions to the backup interface, be sure to apply identical configurations of other traffic parameters to each interface.
PAGE 523
inactive: Vl 1 00:24:55: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Changed interface state to up: Gi 3/42 00:24:55: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to active: Vl 1 00:24:55: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_STBY_ACT: Changed interface state from standby to active: Gi 3/42 Dell(conf-if-gi-3/41)#do show ip int brief | find 3/41 GigabitEthernet 3/41 unassigned NO Manual administratively down down GigabitEthernet 3/42 unassigned YES Manual up up [output omitted] Example of Configuring Redundant Pairs on
PAGE 524
Figure 65. Configuring Far-End Failure Detection The report consists of several packets in SNAP format that are sent to the nearest known MAC address. In the event of a far-end failure, the device stops receiving frames and, after the specified time interval, assumes that the far-end is not available. The connecting line protocol is brought down so that upper layer protocols can detect the neighbor unavailability faster. FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive.
PAGE 525
4. If the FEFD enabled system is configured to use FEFD in Normal mode and neighboring echoes are not received after three intervals, (you can set each interval can be set between 3 and 300 seconds) the state changes to unknown. 5. If the FEFD system has been set to Aggressive mode and neighboring echoes are not received after three intervals, the state changes to Err-disabled.
PAGE 526
To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1. Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3. INTERFACE mode ip address ip address, switchport 2. Activate the necessary ports administratively. INTEFACE mode no shutdown 3. Enable fefd globally. CONFIGURATION mode fefd {interval | mode} Example of the show fefd Command To display information about the state of each interface, use the show fefd command in EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 527
To set up and activate two or more connected interfaces, use the following commands. 1. Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3. INTERFACE mode ip address ip address, switchport 2. Activate the necessary ports administratively. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3.
PAGE 528
Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 1/0) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 4/0) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) 2w1d22h : FEFD packet received on interface Gi 4/0 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 1/0) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Gi 4/0) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) An RPM Failover In the event that an RPM failover occurs, FEFD becomes operationally down
PAGE 529
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 26 The link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) is supported on the S6000 platform. 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices.
PAGE 530
Table 37. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Types Type TLV Description 0 End of LLDPDU Marks the end of an LLDPDU. 1 Chassis ID An administratively assigned name that identifies the LLDP agent. 2 Port ID An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received. 3 Time to Live An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received.
PAGE 531
Figure 68. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 38. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
PAGE 532
Type TLV Description 127 Protocol Identity Indicates the protocols that the port can process. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV. 127 MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Indicates the capability and current setting of the duplex status and bit rate, and whether the current settings are the result of auto-negotiation. This TLV is not available in the Dell Networking OS implementation of LLDP, but is available and mandatory (non-configurable) in the LLDP-MED implementation.
PAGE 533
Regarding connected endpoint devices, LLDP-MED provides network connectivity devices with the ability to: • manage inventory • manage Power over Ethernet (PoE) • identify physical location • identify network policy LLDP-MED is designed for, but not limited to, VoIP endpoints. TIA Organizationally Specific TLVs The Dell Networking system is an LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device (Device Type 4).
PAGE 534
Type SubType TLV Description None or all TLVs must be supported. Dell Networking OS does not currently support these TLVs. 127 5 Inventory — Hardware Revision Indicates the hardware revision of the LLDPMED device. 127 6 Inventory — Firmware Revision Indicates the firmware revision of the LLDPMED device. 127 7 Inventory — Software Revision Indicates the software revision of the LLDPMED device. 127 8 Inventory — Serial Number Indicates the device serial number of the LLDP-MED device.
PAGE 535
Figure 69. LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV Table 40. Dell Networking OS LLDP-MED Capabilities Bit Position TLV Dell Networking OS Support 0 LLDP-MED Capabilities Yes 1 Network Policy Yes 2 Location Identification Yes 3 Extended Power via MDI-PSE Yes 4 Extended Power via MDI-PD No 5 Inventory No 6–15 reserved No Table 41.
PAGE 536
NOTE: As shown in the following table, signaling is a series of control packets that are exchanged between an endpoint device and a network connectivity device to establish and maintain a connection. These signal packets might require a different network policy than the media packets for which a connection is made. In this case, configure the signaling application. Table 42.
PAGE 537
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. • Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
PAGE 538
Important Points to Remember • LLDP is enabled by default. • Dell Networking systems support up to eight neighbors per interface. • Dell Networking systems support a maximum of 8000 total neighbors per system. If the number of interfaces multiplied by eight exceeds the maximum, the system does not configure more than 8000. • INTERFACE level configurations override all CONFIGURATION level configurations. • LLDP is not hitless.
PAGE 539
Enabling LLDP LLDP is enabled by default. Enable and disable LLDP globally or per interface. If you enable LLDP globally, all UP interfaces send periodic LLDPDUs. To enable LLDP, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2. Enable LLDP. PROTOCOL LLDP mode no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. • Disable LLDP globally or for an interface.
PAGE 540
3. Enter the disable command. LLDP-MANAGEMENT-INTERFACE mode. To undo an LLDP management port configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Advertising TLVs You can configure the system to advertise TLVs out of all interfaces or out of specific interfaces. • If you configure the system globally, all interfaces send LLDPDUs with the specified TLVs. • If you configure an interface, only the interface sends LLDPDUs with the specified TLVs.
PAGE 541
Figure 72. Configuring LLDP Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration, use the following command. • Display the LLDP configuration.
PAGE 542
Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Agents To view brief information about adjacent devices or to view all the information that neighbors are advertising, use the following commands. • Display brief information about adjacent devices. • show lldp neighbors Display all of the information that neighbors are advertising.
PAGE 543
Configuring LLDPDU Intervals LLDPDUs are transmitted periodically; the default interval is 30 seconds. To configure LLDPDU intervals, use the following command. • Configure a non-default transmit interval.
PAGE 544
• Return to the default setting.
PAGE 545
advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#multiplier ? <2-10> Multiplier (default=4) R1(conf-lldp)#multiplier 5 R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description multiplier 5 no disable R1(conf-lldp)#no multiplier R1(conf-lldp)#show
PAGE 546
Figure 73. The debug lldp detail Command — LLDPDU Packet Dissection Relevant Management Objects Dell Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects. The following tables list the objects associated with: • received and transmitted TLVs • the LLDP configuration on the local agent • IEEE 802.1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs • received and transmitted LLDP-MED TLVs Table 43.
PAGE 547
MIB Object Category Basic TLV Selection LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description msgTxInterval lldpMessageTxInterval Transmit Interval value. rxInfoTTL lldpRxInfoTTL Time to live for received TLVs. txInfoTTL lldpTxInfoTTL Time to live for transmitted TLVs. mibBasicTLVsTxEnable lldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnabl e Indicates which management TLVs are enabled for system ports.
PAGE 548
Table 44.
PAGE 549
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System interface numbering Local subtype interface number OID LLDP MIB Object lldpLocManAddrIfSu btype Remote lldpRemManAddrIfS ubtype Local lldpLocManAddrIfId Remote lldpRemManAddrIfId Local lldpLocManAddrOID Remote lldpRemManAddrOI D Table 45. LLDP 802.
PAGE 550
Table 46.
PAGE 551
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP-MED MIB Object 3 Location Data Format Local lldpXMedLocLocatio nSubtype Remote lldpXMedRemLocati onSubtype Local lldpXMedLocLocatio nInfo Remote lldpXMedRemLocati onInfo Local lldpXMedLocXPoED eviceType Remote lldpXMedRemXPoED eviceType Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPS EPowerSource Location Identifier Location ID Data 4 Extended Power via MDI Power Device Type Power Source lldpXMedLocXPoEP DPowerSource Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEP SEPowerSource lld
PAGE 552
Microsoft Network Load Balancing 27 This functionality is supported on the S6000 platform. Network Load Balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
PAGE 553
• With NLB feature enabled, after learning the NLB ARP entry, all the subsequent traffic is flooded on all ports in VLAN1. With NLB, the data frame is forwarded to all the servers for them to perform load-balancing. NLB Multicast Mode Scenario Consider a sample topology in which four servers, namely S1 through S4, are configured as a cluster or a farm. This set of servers is connected to a Layer 3 switch, which in turn is connected to the end-clients.
PAGE 554
flooded out of all member ports. Since all the servers in the cluster receive traffic, failover and balancing are preserved. Enable and Disable VLAN Flooding • The older ARP entries are overwritten whenever newer NLB entries are learned. • All ARP entries, learned after the feature is enabled, are deleted when the feature is disabled, and RP2 triggers an ARP resolution. The feature is disabled with the no ip vlan-flooding command.
PAGE 555
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) 28 Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on the S6000 platform. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
PAGE 556
Figure 74. Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected. Figure 75.
PAGE 557
Anycast RP Using MSDP, anycast RP provides load sharing and redundancy in PIM-SM networks. Anycast RP allows two or more rendezvous points (RPs) to share the load for source registration and the ability to act as hot backup routers for each other. Anycast RP allows you to configure two or more RPs with the same IP address on Loopback interfaces. The Anycast RP Loopback address are configured with a 32-bit mask, making it a host address.
PAGE 558
• Accept Source-Active Messages that Fail the RFP Check • Specifying Source-Active Messages • Limiting the Source-Active Cache • Preventing MSDP from Caching a Local Source • Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source • Preventing MSDP from Advertising a Local Source • Terminating a Peership • Clearing Peer Statistics • Debugging MSDP • MSDP with Anycast RP • MSDP Sample Configurations Figure 76.
PAGE 559
Figure 77.
PAGE 560
Figure 78.
PAGE 561
Figure 79. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1. Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2. Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains.
PAGE 562
Examples of Configuring and Viewing MSDP R3_E600(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3_E600(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 connect-source Loopback 0 R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Description Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache).
PAGE 563
Limiting the Source-Active Cache Set the upper limit of the number of active sources that the Dell Networking OS caches. The default active source limit is 500K messages. When the total number of active sources reaches the specified limit, subsequent active sources are dropped even if they pass the reverse path forwarding (RPF) and policy check. To limit the number of sources that SA cache stores, use the following command. • Limit the number of sources that can be stored in the SA cache.
PAGE 564
Figure 80.
PAGE 565
Figure 81.
PAGE 566
Figure 82.
PAGE 567
Figure 83. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
PAGE 568
Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard fifty Dell(conf)#seq 5 permit host 200.0.0.50 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache MSDP Source-Active Cache - 3 entries GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 229.0.50.2 24.0.50.2 200.0.0.50 10.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 24.0.50.3 200.0.0.50 10.0.50.2 229.0.50.4 24.0.50.4 200.0.0.50 10.0.50.2 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.
PAGE 569
Example of Verifying the System is not Caching Local Sources When you apply this filter, the SA cache is not affected immediately. When sources that are denied by the ACL time out, they are not refreshed. Until they time out, they continue to reside in the cache. To apply the redistribute filter to entries already present in the SA cache, first clear the SA cache. You may optionally store denied sources in the rejected SA cache. R1_E600(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 570
R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R3_E600(conf)# R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(639) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Listening Up/Down Time: 00:01:19 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none Preventing MSDP from Advertising a Local Source To prevent MSDP from advertising a local source, use the following command.
PAGE 571
Logging Changes in Peership States To log changes in peership states, use the following command. • Log peership state changes. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp log-adjacency-changes Terminating a Peership MSDP uses TCP as its transport protocol. In a peering relationship, the peer with the lower IP address initiates the TCP session, while the peer with the higher IP address listens on port 639. • Terminate the TCP connection with a peer.
PAGE 572
Example of the clear ip msdp peer Command and Verifying Statistics are Cleared R3_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.3(639) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Established Up/Down Time: 00:04:26 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 5/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none R3_E600(conf)#do clear ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 573
technique is less effective as traffic increases because preemptive load balancing requires prior knowledge of traffic distributions. • lack of scalable register decasulation: With only a single RP per group, all joins are sent to that RP regardless of the topological distance between the RP, sources, and receivers, and data is transmitted to the RP until the SPT switch threshold is reached.
PAGE 574
Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2. Make this address the RP for the group. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim rp-address 3. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create another Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with a unique IP address.
PAGE 575
CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp originator-id Examples of R1, R2, and R3 Configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP The following example shows an R1 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.3.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 ip address 10.11.2.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.12/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.
PAGE 576
no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.22/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.4.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.22/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 100 ! router bgp 100 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.3 remote-as 200 neighbor 192.168.0.3 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.3 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
PAGE 577
neighbor neighbor neighbor neighbor ! ip ip ip ip ! ip ip ! ip 192.168.0.22 192.168.0.22 192.168.0.22 192.168.0.22 remote-as 100 ebgp-multihop 255 update-source Loopback 0 no shutdown multicast-msdp msdp peer 192.168.0.11 connect-source Loopback 0 msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 0 msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.22 route 192.168.0.1/32 10.11.0.23 route 192.168.0.22/32 10.11.0.23 pim rp-address 192.168.0.3 group-address 224.0.0.
PAGE 578
interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.2/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.4.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
PAGE 579
redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.2 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip route 192.168.0.2/32 10.11.0.23 ip multicast-routing ! interface GigabitEthernet 4/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 4/22 ip address 10.10.42.
PAGE 580
29 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) is supported on the S6000 platform. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves on per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances.
PAGE 581
Spanning Tree Variations The Dell Networking OS supports four variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 47. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information The following describes the MSTP implementation information.
PAGE 582
• Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes • Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally MSTP is not enabled by default. To enable MSTP globally, use the following commands. When you enable MSTP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the MSTI 0. • Within an MSTI, only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled.
PAGE 583
Specify the keyword vlan then the VLANs that you want to participate in the MSTI. Examples of Configuring and Viewing MSTI The following examples shows the msti command. Dell(conf)#protocol spanning-tree mstp Dell(conf-mstp)#msti 1 vlan 100 Dell(conf-mstp)#msti 2 vlan 200-300 Dell(conf-mstp)#show config ! protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200-300 All bridges in the MSTP region must have the same VLAN-to-instance mapping.
PAGE 584
Influencing MSTP Root Selection MSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the probability that it becomes the root bridge. To change the bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a number as the bridge priority. PROTOCOL MSTP mode msti instance bridge-priority priority A lower number increases the probability that the bridge becomes the root bridge. The range is from 0 to 61440, in increments of 4096. The default is 32768.
PAGE 585
NOTE: Some non-Dell Networking OS equipment may implement a non-null default region name. SFTOS, for example, uses the Bridge ID, while others may use a MAC address. Changing the Region Name or Revision To change the region name or revision, use the following commands. • Change the region name. PROTOCOL MSTP mode • name name Change the region revision number.
PAGE 586
To change the MSTP parameters, use the following commands on the root bridge. 1. Change the forward-delay parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode forward-delay seconds The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds. 2. Change the hello-time parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode hello-time seconds NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. 3. Change the max-age parameter.
PAGE 587
Modifying the Interface Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • • Port cost is a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. Port priority influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
PAGE 588
you implement only bpduguard, although the interface is placed in an Error Disabled state when receiving the BPDU, the physical interface remains up and spanning-tree drops packets in the hardware after a BPDU violation. BPDUs are dropped in the software after receiving the BPDU violation. This feature is the same as PortFast mode in spanning tree. CAUTION: Configure EdgePort only on links connecting to an end station. EdgePort can cause loops if you enable it on an interface connected to a network.
PAGE 589
To view the enable status of this feature, use the show running-config spanning-tree mstp command from EXEC Privilege mode. MSTP Sample Configurations The running-configurations support the topology shown in the following illustration. The configurations are from Dell Networking OS systems. Figure 86. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1.
PAGE 590
! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3.
PAGE 591
Router 3 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3. Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
PAGE 592
(Step 2) interface 1/0/31 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit interface 1/0/32 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • Display BPDUs.
PAGE 593
– As shown in the following, the MSTP routers are located in the same region. – Does the debug log indicate that packets are coming from a “Different Region”? If so, one of the key parameters is not matching. • MSTP Region Name and Revision. – The configured name and revisions must be identical among all the routers.
PAGE 594
The following example shows viewing the debug log of an unsuccessful MSTP configuration. 4w0d4h : MSTP: Received BPDU on Gi 2/21 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x78Different Region (Indicates MSTP routers are in different regions and are not communicating with each other.) CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.
PAGE 595
Multicast Features 30 Multicast features are supported on the S6000 platform. NOTE: Multicast is supported on secondary IP addresses on the platform. NOTE: Multicast routing for IPv6 is not supported. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the following multicast protocols: • PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) • Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) • Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Enabling IP Multicast Enable IP multicast is supported on the S6000 platform.
PAGE 596
Figure 87. Multicast with ECMP Implementation Information Because protocol control traffic in Dell Networking OS is redirected using the MAC address, and multicast control traffic and multicast data traffic might map to the same MAC address, Dell Networking OS might forward data traffic with certain MAC addresses to the CPU in addition to control traffic. As the upper5 bits of an IP Multicast address are dropped in the translation, 32 different multicast group IDs all map to the same Ethernet address.
PAGE 597
Protocol Ethernet Address PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fennertraceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • Egress L3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic if you enable multicast routing. First Packet Forwarding for Lossless Multicast All initial multicast packets are forwarded to receivers to achieve lossless multicast.
PAGE 598
• If the limit is decreased after it is reached, Dell Networking OS does not clear the existing sessions. Entries are cleared after a timeout (you may also clear entries using clear ip mroute). NOTE: Dell Networking OS waits at least 30 seconds between stopping and starting IGMP join processing. You may experience this delay when manipulating the limit after it is reached.
PAGE 599
no access list limiting Receiver 1, so both IGMP reports are accepted, and two corresponding entries are created in the routing table. Figure 88. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group Table 49. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • Multicast Features Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.
PAGE 600
Location Description • no shutdown 1/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.1/24 no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.
PAGE 601
Location Description • • ip igmp access-group igmpjoinfilR2G2 no shutdown Rate Limiting IGMP Join Requests If you expect a burst of IGMP Joins, protect the IGMP process from overload by limiting that rate at which new groups can be joined. Hosts whose IGMP requests are denied will use the retry mechanism built-in to IGMP so that they’re membership is delayed rather than permanently denied. • Limit the rate at which new groups can be joined.
PAGE 602
IPv6 specified rate. The keyword infinity directs PIM to never switch to the SPT. Default: 10 kbps Configure PIM to switch over to the SPT when the multicast packet rate is at or beyond a specified rate. The keyword infinity directs PIM to never switch to the SPT.
PAGE 603
Figure 89. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group Table 51. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
PAGE 604
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface GigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
PAGE 605
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
PAGE 606
Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) 31 Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on the S6000 platform. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
PAGE 607
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 90. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
PAGE 608
The backbone is the only area with a default area number. All other areas can have their Area ID assigned in the configuration. In the previous example, Routers A, B, C, G, H, and I are the Backbone. • A stub area (SA) does not receive external route information, except for the default route. These areas do receive information from inter-area (IA) routes. NOTE: Configure all routers within an assigned stub area as stubby, and not generate LSAs that do not apply.
PAGE 609
Figure 91. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
PAGE 610
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) The autonomous system border area router (ASBR) connects to more than one AS and exchanges information with the routers in other ASs. Generally, the ASBR connects to a non-interior gate protocol (IGP) such as BGP or uses static routes.
PAGE 611
available. An ABR floods the information for the router (for example, the ASBR where the Type 5 advertisement originated. The link-state ID for Type 4 LSAs is the router ID of the described ASBR). • Type 5: LSA — These LSAs contain information imported into OSPF from other routing processes. They are flooded to all areas, except stub areas. The link-state ID of the Type 5 LSA is the external network number.
PAGE 612
Router Priority and Cost Router priority and cost is the method the system uses to “rate” the routers. For example, if not assigned, the system selects the router with the highest priority as the DR. The second highest priority is the BDR. • • Priority is a numbered rating 0 to 255. The higher the number, the higher the priority. Cost is a numbered rating 1 to 65535. The higher the number, the greater the cost. The cost assigned reflects the cost should the router fail.
PAGE 613
Dell Networking OS supports stub areas, totally stub (no summary) and not so stubby areas (NSSAs) and supports the following LSAs, as described earlier.
PAGE 614
OSPFv2 supports helper-only and restarting-only roles. By default, both helper and restarting roles are enabled. OSPFv2 supports the helper-reject role globally on a router. OSPFv3 supports helper-only and restarting-only roles. The helper-only role is enabled by default. To enable the restarting role in addition to the helper-only role, configure a grace period. Reconfigure OSPFv3 graceful restart to a restarting-only role when you enable the helper-reject role on an interface.
PAGE 615
example, if you create five OSPFv2 processes on a system, there must be at least five interfaces assigned in Layer 3 mode. Each OSPFv2 process is independent. If one process loses adjacency, the other processes continue to function. Processing SNMP and Sending SNMP Traps Though there are may be several OSPFv2 processes, only one process can process simple network management protocol (SNMP) requests and send SNMP traps.
PAGE 616
LSType:Type-5 AS External(5) Age:1 Seq:0x8000000c id:170.1.2.0 Adv:6.1.0.0 Netmask:255.255.255.0 fwd:0.0.0.0 E2, tos:0 metric:0 To confirm that you enabled RFC-2328–compliant OSPF flooding, use the show ip ospf command. Dell#show ip ospf Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 2.2.2.
PAGE 617
Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 1.1.1.1 (Backup Designated Router) Dell (conf-if-gi-2/2)# Configuration Information The interfaces must be in Layer-3 mode (assigned an IP address) and enabled so that they can send and receive traffic. The OSPF process must know about these interfaces. To make the OSPF process aware of these interfaces, they must be assigned to OSPF areas. You must configure OSPF GLOBALLY on the system in CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 618
If implementing multi-process OSPF, create an equal number of Layer 3 enabled interfaces and OSPF process IDs. For example, if you create four OSPFv2 process IDs, you must have four interfaces with Layer 3 enabled. 1. Assign an IP address to an interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask The format is A.B.C.D/M. If you are using a Loopback interface, refer to Loopback Interfaces. 2. Enable the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3.
PAGE 619
• Reset the OSPFv2 process. EXEC Privilege mode • clear ip ospf process-id View the current OSPFv2 status. EXEC mode show ip ospf process-id Example of Viewing the Current OSPFv2 Status Dell#show ip ospf 55555 Routing Process ospf 55555 with ID 10.10.10.
PAGE 620
3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPFv2 process globally. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf] The range is from 0 to 65535. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system. If you try to enable more OSPF processes than available Layer 3 interfaces, the following message displays: C300(conf)#router ospf 1 % Error: No router ID available.
PAGE 621
In the example below, an IP address is assigned to an interface and an OSPFv2 area is defined that includes the IP address of a Layer 3 interface. The first bold lines assign an IP address to a Layer 3 interface, and theno shutdown command ensures that the interface is UP. The second bold line assigns the IP address of an interface to an area. Example of Enabling OSPFv2 and Assigning an Area to an Interface Dell#(conf)#int gi 4/44 Dell(conf-if-gi-4/44)#ip address 10.10.10.
PAGE 622
Example of Viewing OSPF Status on a Loopback Interface Dell#show ip ospf 1 int GigabitEthernet 13/23 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.168.0.1/24, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 10.168.253.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DROTHER, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.168.253.5, Interface address 10.168.0.4 Backup Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.3, Interface address 10.168.0.
PAGE 623
Example of the show ip ospf database database-summary Command To view which LSAs are transmitted, use the show ip ospf database process-id databasesummary command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip ospf 34 database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (10.1.2.100) (Process ID 34) Area 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.3 Dell# ID Router Network S-Net S-ASBR Type-7 Subtotal 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 To view information on areas, use the show ip ospf process-id command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 624
Example of Viewing Passive Interfaces When you configure a passive interface, the show ip ospf process-id interface command adds the words passive interface to indicate that the hello packets are not transmitted on that interface (shown in bold). Dell#show ip ospf 34 int GigabitEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.2.100/24, Area 1.1.1.1 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DOWN, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.
PAGE 625
NOTE: A higher convergence level can result in occasional loss of OSPF adjacency. Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Only select higher convergence levels following consultation with Dell Technical Support. Examples of the fast-converge Command In the examples below, Convergence Level shows the fast-converge parameter setting and Min LSA origination shows the LSA parameters (shown in bold).
PAGE 626
• Change the time interval between hello-packet transmission. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf hello-interval seconds – seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 10 seconds). • The hello interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Use the MD5 algorithm to produce a message digest or key, which is sent instead of the key. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf message-digest-key keyid md5 key – keyid: the range is from 1 to 255. – Key: a character string.
PAGE 627
The bold lines in the example show the change on the interface. The change is reflected in the OSPF configuration. Dell(conf-if)#ip ospf cost 45 Dell(conf-if)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 10.1.2.100 255.255.255.0 no shutdown ip ospf cost 45 Dell(conf-if)#end Dell#show ip ospf 34 interface GigabitEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.1.2.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.
PAGE 628
Enabling OSPFv2 Graceful Restart Graceful restart is enabled for the global OSPF process. For more information, refer to Graceful Restart. The Dell Networking implementation of OSPFv2 graceful restart enables you to specify: • grace period — the length of time the graceful restart process can last before OSPF terminates it. • helper-reject neighbors — the router ID of each restart router that does not receive assistance from the configured router.
PAGE 629
3. Configure the graceful restart role or roles that this OSPFv2 router performs. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode graceful-restart role [helper-only | restart-only] Dell Networking OS supports the following options: • Helper-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only as a helper router. • Restart-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only during unplanned restarts. By default, OSPFv2 supports both restarting and helper roles.
PAGE 630
seq sequence-number {deny |permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le maxprefix-length] The optional parameters are: – ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). – le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32). For configuration information about prefix lists, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs). Applying Prefix Lists To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing OSPF routes, use the following commands.
PAGE 631
network 10.1.2.32 0.0.0.255 area 2.2.2.2 network 10.1.3.24 0.0.0.255 area 3.3.3.3 distribute-list dilling in Dell(conf-router_ospf)# Troubleshooting OSPFv2 Dell Networking OS has several tools to make troubleshooting easier. Be sure to check the following, as these questions represent typical issues that interrupt an OSPFv2 process. NOTE: The following is not a comprehensive list, just some examples of typical troubleshooting checks.
PAGE 632
• View debug messages. EXEC Privilege mode debug ip ospf process-id [event | packet | spf | database-timers rate-limit] To view debug messages for a specific OSPF process ID, use the debug ip ospf process-id command. If you do not enter a process ID, the command applies to the first OSPF process. To view debug messages for a specific operation, enter one of the optional keywords: – event: view OSPF event messages. – packet: view OSPF packet information. – spf: view SPF information.
PAGE 633
Figure 93. Basic Topology and CLI Commands for OSPFv2 OSPF Area 0 — Gl 1/1 and 1/2 router ospf 11111 network 10.0.11.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.12.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.1.11.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/2 ip address 10.2.12.2/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 10 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Gl 3/1 and 3/2 router ospf 33333 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.
PAGE 634
OSPF Area 0 — Gl 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.2/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/2 ip address 10.2.22.2/24 no shutdown Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) Open shortest path first version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) is supported on the platform.
PAGE 635
Assigning IPv6 Addresses on an Interface To assign IPv6 addresses to an interface, use the following commands. 1. Assign an IPv6 address to the interface. CONF-INT-type slot/port mode ipv6 address ipv6 address IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits; separate each group by a colon (:). The format is A:B:C::F/128. 2. Bring up the interface.
PAGE 636
– number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D. NOTE: Enter the router-id for an OSPFv3 router as an IPv4 IP address. • Disable OSPF. CONFIGURATION mode • no ipv6 router ospf process-id Reset the OSPFv3 process. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 ospf process Enter an example that illustrates the current task (optional). Enter the tasks the user should do after finishing this task (optional). Configuring Stub Areas To configure IPv6 stub areas, use the following command.
PAGE 637
To indicate that hello packets are not transmitted on that interface, when you configure a passive interface, the show ipv6 ospf interface command adds the words passive interface. Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPFv3 process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process. Route redistribution is also supported between OSPF Routing process IDs.
PAGE 638
period command. The grace period is the time that the OSPFv3 neighbors continue to advertise the restarting router as though it is fully adjacent. When you enable graceful restart (restarting role), an OSPFv3 restarting expects its OSPFv3 neighbors to help when it restarts by not advertising the broken link. When you enable the helper-reject role on an interface using the ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject command, you reconfigure OSPFv3 graceful restart to function in a restarting-only role.
PAGE 639
• Display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa Display the currently configured OSPFv3 parameters for graceful restart (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf database database-summary Examples of the Graceful Restart show Commands The following example shows the show run ospf command. Dell#show run ospf ! router ospf 1 router-id 200.1.1.
PAGE 640
The following example shows the show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa command. Dell#show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa ! Type-11 Grace LSA (Area 0) LS Age Link State ID Advertising Router LS Seq Number Checksum Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : : : : : : 10 6.16.192.66 100.1.1.1 0x80000001 0x1DF1 36 Gi 5/3 180 Switch to Redundant Processor OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 authentication using IP security (IPsec) is supported only on platform.
PAGE 641
between the two mechanisms is the extent of the coverage. ESP only protects IP header fields if they are encapsulated by ESP. You decide the set of IPsec protocols that are employed for authentication and encryption and the ways in which they are employed. When you correctly implement and deploy IPsec, it does not adversely affect users or hosts. AH and ESP are designed to be cryptographic algorithm-independent.
PAGE 642
– Configuring IPsec Authentication on an Interface – Configuring IPsec Encryption on an Interface – Configuring IPsec Authentication for an OSPFv3 Area – Configuring IPsec Encryption for an OSPFv3 Area – Displaying OSPFv3 IPsec Security Policies Configuring IPsec Authentication on an Interface To configure, remove, or display IPsec authentication on an interface, use the following commands.
PAGE 643
NOTE: When you configure encryption using the ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec command, you enable both IPsec encryption and authentication. However, when you enable authentication on an interface using the ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec command, you do not enable encryption at the same time. The SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (the same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link.
PAGE 644
If you have enabled IPSec encryption in an OSPFv3 area using the area encryption command, you cannot use the area authentication command in the area at the same time. The configuration of IPSec authentication on an interface-level takes precedence over an area-level configuration. If you remove an interface configuration, an area authentication policy that has been configured is applied to the interface. • Enable IPSec authentication for OSPFv3 packets in an area.
PAGE 645
– area area-id: specifies the area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For area-id, enter a number or an IPv6 prefix. – spi number: is the security policy index (SPI) value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. – esp encryption-algorithm: specifies the encryption algorithm used with ESP. The valid values are 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL. For AES-CBC, only the AES-128 and AES-192 ciphers are supported. – key: specifies the text string used in the encryption.
PAGE 646
Examples of the show crypto ipsec Commands In the first example, the keys are not encrypted (shown in bold). In the second and third examples, the keys are encrypted (shown in bold). The following example shows the show crypto ipsec policy command.
PAGE 647
outbound ah sas spi : 500 (0x1f4) transform : ah-md5-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE inbound esp sas outbound esp sas Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d11 IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-600 inbound ah sas outbound ah sas inbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des
PAGE 648
• show ipv6 routes Viewing Summary Information To get general route, configuration, links status, and debug information, use the following commands. • View the summary information of the IPv6 routes. EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 route summary View the summary information for the OSPFv3 database. EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf database View the configuration of OSPFv3 neighbors. EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf neighbor View debug messages for all OSPFv3 interfaces.
PAGE 649
Policy-based Routing (PBR) 32 Policy-based Routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface.
PAGE 650
To enable a PBR, you create a redirect list. Redirect lists are defined by rules, or routing policies.
PAGE 651
Implementing Policy-based Routing with Dell Networking OS • Non-contiguous bitmasks for PBR • Hot-Lock PBR Non-contiguous bitmasks for PBR Non-contiguous bitmasks for PBR allows more granular and flexible control over routing policies. Network addresses that are in the middle of a subnet can be included or excluded. Specific bitmasks can be entered using the dotted decimal format. Non-contiguous bitmask example Dell#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list rcl0: Defined as: seq 5 permit ip 200.200.200.
PAGE 652
The following example creates a redirect list by the name of “xyz.” Dell(conf)#ip redirect-list ? WORD Redirect-list name (max 16 chars) Dell(conf)#ip redirect-list xyz Create a Rule for a Redirect-list Use the following command in CONFIGURATION REDIRECT-LIST mode to set the rules for the redirect list. You can enter the command multiple times and create a sequence of redirect rules. Use the seq nn redirect version of the command to organize your rules.
PAGE 653
Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ? <0-255> An IP protocol number icmp Internet Control Message Protocol ip Any Internet Protocol tcp Transmission Control Protocol udp User Datagram Protocol Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip ? A.B.C.D Source address any Any source host host A single source host Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 ? Mask A.B.C.D or /nn Mask in dotted decimal or in format Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.3 ip 222.1.1.1 /32 ? A.B.C.
PAGE 654
PBR Exceptions (Permit) Use the command permit to create an exception to a redirect list. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. Dell Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries. Since the order of rules is important, ensure that you configure any necessary sequence numbers.
PAGE 655
Applying a Redirect-list to an Interface Example: Dell(conf-if-te-2/0)#ip redirect-group xyz Dell(conf-if-te-2/0)# Applying a Redirect-list to an Interface Example: Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)#ip redirect-group test Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)#ip redirect-group xyz Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/0 no ip address ip redirect-group test ip redirect-group xyz shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/0)# In addition to supporting multiple redirect-lists in a redirect-group, multiple redirect-groups are su
PAGE 656
NOTE: If, the redirect-list is applied to an interface, the output of show ip redirect-list redirect-listname command displays reachability and ARP status for the specified next-hop.
PAGE 657
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/23)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.
PAGE 658
View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23), ARP resolved seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.
PAGE 659
PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) 33 Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is supported on the S6000 platform. PIM-SM is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop. Implementation Information Be aware of the following PIM-SM implementation information.
PAGE 660
3. If a host on the same subnet as another multicast receiver sends an IGMP report for the same multicast group, the gateway takes no action. If a router between the host and the RP receives a PIM Join message for which it already has a (*,G) entry, the interface on which the message was received is added to the outgoing interface list associated with the (*,G) entry, and the message is not (and does not need to be) forwarded towards the RP.
PAGE 661
Configuring PIM-SM Configuring PIM-SM is a three-step process. 1. Enable multicast routing (refer to the following step). 2. Select a rendezvous point. 3. Enable PIM-SM on an interface. Enable multicast routing. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks.
PAGE 662
To display PIM neighbors for each interface, use the show ip pim neighbor command EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip Neighbor Address 127.87.5.5 127.87.3.5 127.87.50.5 Dell# pim neighbor Interface Uptime/Expires Ver Te 0/11 Te 0/12 Te 1/13 v2 v2 v2 01:44:59/00:01:16 01:45:00/00:01:16 00:03:08/00:01:37 DR Prio/Mode 1 / S 1 / DR 1 / S To display the PIM routing table, use the show ip pim tib command from EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 663
To configure a global expiry time or to configure the expiry time for a particular (S,G) entry, use the following commands. 1. Enable global expiry timer for S, G entries. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer seconds The range is from 211 to 86,400 seconds. The default is 210. 2. Create an extended ACL. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 3. Specify the source and group to which the timer is applied using extended ACLs with permit rules only.
PAGE 664
Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point The rendezvous point (RP) is a PIM-enabled interface on a router that acts as the root a group-specific tree; every group must have an RP. • Identify an RP by the IP address of a PIM-enabled or Loopback interface. ip pim rp-address Example of Viewing an RP on a Loopback Interface Dell#sh run int loop0 ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 1.1.1.1/32 ip pim sparse-mode no shutdown Dell#sh run pim ! ip pim rp-address 1.1.1.1 group-address 224.0.0.
PAGE 665
interface out of which it is sent and a DR priority value. The router with the greatest priority value is the DR. If the priority value is the same for two routers, then the router with the greatest IP address is the DR. By default, the DR priority value is 192, so the IP address determines the DR. • Assign a DR priority value. INTERFACE mode • ip pim dr-priority priority-value Change the interval at which a router sends hello messages.
PAGE 666
Enter the tasks the user should do after finishing this task (optional).
PAGE 667
PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) 34 PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is supported on the S6000 platform. PIM-SSM is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
PAGE 668
Configure PIM-SMM Configuring PIM-SSM is a two-step process. 1. Configure PIM-SMM. 2. Enable PIM-SSM for a range of addresses. Related Configuration Tasks • Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1. Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2. Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created.
PAGE 669
• • • When you remove the mapping configuration, Dell Networking OS removes the corresponding (S,G) states that it created and re-establishes the original (*,G) states. You may enter multiple ssm-map commands for different access lists. You may also enter multiple ssm-map commands for the same access list, as long as they use different source addresses. When an extended ACL is associated with this command, Dell Networking OS displays an error message.
PAGE 670
Interface Vlan 400 Group 239.0.0.1 Uptime 00:00:05 Expires Never Router mode INCLUDE Last reporter 10.11.4.2 Last reporter mode INCLUDE Last report received ALLOW Group source list Source address Uptime Expires 10.11.5.
PAGE 671
35 Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on the S6000 platform. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
PAGE 672
2 Te 0/0 Te 0/2 both Port N/A N/A Dell (conf-mon-sess-2)#do show running-config monitor session ! monitor session 1 source TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 destination TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 direction both ! monitor session 2 source TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 destination TenGigabitEthernet 0/2 direction both Dell (conf-mon-sess-2)# ! Port Monitoring The S6000 supports multiple source-destination statements in a single monitor session. The maximum number of source ports that can be supported in a session is 128.
PAGE 673
0 10 20 30 300 Te Te Te Te Te 0/13 0/14 0/15 0/16 0/17 Gi Gi Gi Gi Gi 0/1 0/2 0/3 0/37 0/1 rx rx rx rx tx interface interface interface interface interface Port-based Port-based Port-based Port-based Port-based Example of Viewing a Monitoring Session In the example below, 0/25 and 0/26 belong to Port-pipe 1. This port-pipe has the same restriction of only four destination ports, new or used.
PAGE 674
Configuring Port Monitoring To configure port monitoring, use the following commands. 1. Verify that the intended monitoring port has no configuration other than no shutdown, as shown in the following example. EXEC Privilege mode show interface 2. Create a monitoring session using the command monitor session from CONFIGURATION mode, as shown in the following example. CONFIGURATION mode monitor session monitor session type rpm/erpm type is an optional keyword, required only for rpm and erpm 3.
PAGE 675
Note: Source as VLAN is achieved via Flow based mirroring. Please refer section Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring. In the following example, the host and server are exchanging traffic which passes through the uplink interface 1/1. Port 1/1 is the monitored port and port 1/42 is the destination port, which is configured to only monitor traffic received on tengigabitethernet 1/1 (host-originated traffic). Figure 95.
PAGE 676
3. Apply the ACL to the monitored port. INTERFACE mode ip access-group access-list Example of the flow-based enable Command To view an access-list that you applied to an interface, use the show ip accounting access-list command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell(conf)#monitor session 0 Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#flow-based enable Dell(conf)#ip access-list ext testflow Dell(config-ext-nacl)#seq 5 permit icmp any any count bytes monitor Dell(config-ext-nacl)#seq 10 permit ip 102.1.1.
PAGE 677
Remote Port Mirroring Example Remote port mirroring uses the analyzers shown in the aggregation network in Site A. The VLAN traffic on monitored links from the access network is tagged and assigned to a dedicated L2 VLAN. Monitored links are configured in two source sessions shown with orange and green circles. Each source session uses a separate reserved VLAN to transmit mirrored packets (mirrored source-session traffic is shown with an orange or green circle with a blue border).
PAGE 678
• You can configure any switch in the network with source ports and destination ports, and allow it to function in an intermediate transport session for a reserved VLAN at the same time for multiple remote-port mirroring sessions. You can enable and disable individual mirroring sessions. • BPDU monitoring is not required to use remote port mirroring.
PAGE 679
• By default, destination port sends the mirror traffic to the probe port by stripping off the rpm header. We can also configure the destination port to send the mirror traffic with the rpm header intact in the original mirror traffic.. • By default, ingress traffic on a destination port is dropped. Restrictions When you configure remote port mirroring, the following restrictions apply: • You can configure the same source port to be used in multiple source sessions.
PAGE 680
R R 100 300 Active Active T Fo 0/44 T Fo 0/52 Configuring the Sample Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
PAGE 681
Dell(conf)#mac access-list standard mac_acl Dell(config-std-macl)#permit 00:00:00:00:11:22 count monitor Dell(config-std-macl)#exit Dell(conf)#interface vlan 100 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#mac access-group mac_acl1 in Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#exit Dell(conf)#inte te 0/30 Dell(conf-if-te-0/30)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-0/30)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-0/30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface vlan 30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#mode remote-port-mirroring Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#tagged te 0/30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface
PAGE 682
Dell(conf-if-vl-20)#mode remote-port-mirroring Dell(conf-if-vl-20)#tagged te 0/1 Dell(conf-if-vl-20)#exit Dell(conf)#interface vlan 30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#mode remote-port-mirroring Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#tagged te 0/2 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 1 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#source remote-vlan 10 dest te 0/3 Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 2 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#source remote-vlan 20 destination te 0/4 Dell(conf-mon-sess-2)#tagged destination te 0/4 D
PAGE 683
5. Show the output for the LACP. Dell#show interfaces port-channel brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel O - OpenFlow Controller Port-channel LAG L1 L2 Dell# Mode L3 L2 Status up up Uptime 00:01:17 00:00:58 Ports Te 0/44 Te 0/45 (Up) (Up) Configuring the Encapsulated Remote Port Mirroring The ERPM session copies traffic from the source ports/lags or source VLANs and forwards the traffic using routable GRE-encapsulated packets to the destination ip address specified in the session.
PAGE 684
4 direction Specify rx, tx or both in case to monitor ingress/egress or both ingress and egress packets on the specified port.. 5 erpm source-ip dest-ip Specify the source ip address and the destination ip where the packet needs to be sent. 6 flow-based enable Specify flow-based enable for mirroring on a flow by flow basis and also for vlan as source. 7 no enable (Optional) No disable command is mandatory in order for a erpm session to be active.
PAGE 685
ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. As seen in the above figure, the packets received/transmitted on Port A will be encapsulated with an IP/GRE header plus a new L2 header and sent to the destination ip address (Port D’s ip address) on the sniffer.
PAGE 686
39th byte in a given ERPM packet. The first 38/42 bytes of the header needs to be ignored/ chopped off. – Some tools support options to edit the capture file. We can make use of such features (for example: editcap ) and chop the ERPM header part and save it to a new trace file. This new file (i.e. the original mirrored packet) can be converted back into stream and fed to any egress interface. b.
PAGE 687
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) 36 Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is supported on the S6000 platform. Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). For more information about spanning tree, refer to the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) chapter. Figure 96.
PAGE 688
Table 52. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking OS Supports Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
PAGE 689
Enabling PVST+ When you enable PVST+, Dell Networking OS instantiates STP on each active VLAN. 1. Enter PVST context. PROTOCOL PVST mode protocol spanning-tree pvst 2. Enable PVST+. PROTOCOL PVST mode no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode • disable Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration.
PAGE 690
Figure 97. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
PAGE 691
Root Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge Identifier has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 We are the root of VLAN 100 Current root has priority 4096, Address 0001.e80d.b6d6 Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Gi 1/32 Port 375 (GigabitEthernet 1/22) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.
PAGE 692
PROTOCOL PVST mode vlan max-age The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. The values for global PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command. Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type.
PAGE 693
The range is from 0 to 240, in increments of 16. The default is 128. The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
PAGE 694
PVST+ in Multi-Vendor Networks Some non-Dell Networking systems which have hybrid ports participating in PVST+ transmit two kinds of BPDUs: an 802.1D BPDU and an untagged PVST+ BPDU. Dell Networking systems do not expect PVST+ BPDU (tagged or untagged) on an untagged port. If this situation occurs, Dell Networking OS places the port in an Error-Disable state. This behavior might result in the network not converging.
PAGE 695
Example of Viewing the Extend System ID in a PVST+ Configuration Dell(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
PAGE 696
no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged GigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 200 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R3) interface GigabitEthernet 3/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 3/22 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged GigabitEthe
PAGE 697
Quality of Service (QoS) 37 Quality of service (QoS) is supported on the S6000 platform. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 54.
PAGE 698
Feature Direction Configure a Scheduler to Queue Egress Specify WRED Drop Precedence Egress Create Policy Maps Ingress + Egress Create Input Policy Maps Ingress Honor DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling StrictPriority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress
PAGE 699
Figure 99. Dell Networking QoS Architecture Implementation Information The Dell Networking QoS implementation complies with IEEE 802.1p User Priority Bits for QoS Indication.
PAGE 700
Setting dot1p Priorities for Incoming Traffic Dell Networking OS places traffic marked with a priority in a queue based on the following table. If you set a dot1p priority for a port-channel, all port-channel members are configured with the same value. You cannot assign a dot1p value to an individual interface in a port-channel. Table 55. dot1p-priority Values and Queue Numbers dot1p Queue Number 0 2 1 0 2 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 • Change the priority of incoming traffic on the interface.
PAGE 701
Example of Configuring an Interface to Honor dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic Dell#config t Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/0 Dell(conf-if)#service-class dynamic dot1p Dell(conf-if)#end Dell# Priority-Tagged Frames on the Default VLAN Priority-tagged frames on the default VLAN is available on the S6000 platform. Priority-tagged frames are 802.1Q tagged frames with VLAN ID 0. For VLAN classification, these packets are treated as untagged.
PAGE 702
• rate shape Apply rate shaping to a queue. QoS Policy mode rate-shape Example of rate shape Command Dell#config Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/0 Dell(conf-if)#rate shape 500 50 Dell(conf-if)#end Dell# Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 100.
PAGE 703
Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic. For both class maps, Layer 2 and Layer 3, Dell Networking OS matches packets against match criteria in the order that you configure them. Creating a Layer 3 Class Map A Layer 3 class map differentiates ingress packets based on the DSCP value or IP precedence, and characteristics defined in an IP ACL.
PAGE 704
Dell(conf)#policy-map-input pmap Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 3 class-map cmap1 Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 1 class-map cmap2 Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#exit Dell(conf)#interface tegig 1/0 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/0)#service-policy input pmap Examples of Creating a Layer 3 IPv6 Class Map The following example matches IPv6 traffic with a DSCP value of 40.
PAGE 705
ACLs acl1 and acl2 have overlapping rules because the address range 20.1.1.0/24 is within 20.0.0.0/8. Therefore (without the keyword order), packets within the range 20.1.1.0/24 match positive against cmap1 and are buffered in queue 7, though you intended for these packets to match positive against cmap2 and be buffered in queue 4. In cases such as these, where class-maps with overlapping ACL rules are applied to different queues, use the keyword order.
PAGE 706
seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.5 any seq 10 deny ip any any Dell# show cam layer3-qos interface tengigabitethernet 2/49 Cam Port Dscp Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp DSCP Queue Index Flag Port Port Marking ----------------------------------------------------------------------20416 1 18 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.5/32 0.0.0.0/0 20 2 20417 1 18 IP 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 0 20418 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.2/32 0.0.0.0/0 10 1 20419 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.
PAGE 707
• Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently. • If single rate two color policer is configured along with this feature, then by default all packets less than PIR would be considered as “Green” But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”.
PAGE 708
Configuring Policy-Based Rate Policing To configure policy-based rate policing, use the following command. • Configure rate police ingress traffic. QOS-POLICY-IN mode rate-police Setting a dot1p Value for Egress Packets To set a dot1p value for egress packets, use the following command. • Set a dscp or dot1p value for egress packets.
PAGE 709
Table 56. Default Bandwidth Weights Queue Default Weight Equivalent Percentage 0 1 6.67% 1 2 13.33% 2 4 26.67% 3 8 53.33% • Allocate bandwidth to queues. bandwidth-percentage Specifying WRED Drop Precedence Specifying WRED drop precedence is supported on the S6000 platform. • Specify a WRED profile to yellow and/or green traffic. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode wred For more information, refer to Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic.
PAGE 710
• Each color map can only have one list of DSCP values for each color; any DSCP values previously listed for that color that are not in the new DSCP list are colored green. • If you configured a DSCP color map on an interface that does not exist or you delete a DSCP color map that is configured on an interface, that interface uses an all green color policy. To create a DSCP color map: 1. Create the color-aware map QoS DSCP color map. CONFIGURATION mode qos dscp-color-map color-map-name 2.
PAGE 711
Display a specific DSCP color map. Dell# show qos dscp-color-map mapTWO Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Configuration To display the DSCP color policy configuration for one or all interfaces, use the show qos dscpcolor-policy {summary [interface] | detail {interface}} command in EXEC mode. summary: Displays summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces.
PAGE 712
Create Policy Maps There are two types of policy maps: input and output. Creating Input Policy Maps There are two types of input policy-maps: Layer 3 and Layer 2. 1. Create a Layer 3 input policy map. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map-input Create a Layer 2 input policy map by specifying the keyword layer2 with the policy-map-input command. 2.
PAGE 713
Table 57. Default DSCP to Queue Mapping DSCP/CP hex range (XXX)xxx DSCP Definition Traditional IP Precedence Internal Queue ID DSCP/CP decimal 111XXX Network Control 3 48–63 110XXX Internetwork Control 3 48–63 101XXX EF (Expedited Forwarding) CRITIC/ECP 2 32–47 100XXX AF4 (Assured Forwarding) Flash Override 2 32–47 011XXX AF3 Flash 1 16–31 010XXX AF2 Immediate 1 16–31 001XXX AF1 Priority 0 0–15 000XXX BE (Best Effort) Best Effort 0 0–15 Table 58.
PAGE 714
Table 59. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping dot1p Queue ID 0 2 1 0 2 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 The dot1p value is also honored for frames on the default VLAN. For more information, refer to PriorityTagged Frames on the Default VLAN. • Enable the trust dot1p feature. POLICY-MAP-IN mode trust dot1p Mapping dot1p Values to Service Queues All traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0.
PAGE 715
• You cannot apply an input Layer 2 QoS policy on an interface you also configure with vlan-stack access. • If you apply a service policy that contains an ACL to more than one interface, Dell Networking OS uses ACL optimization to conserve CAM space. The ACL optimization behavior detects when an ACL exists in the CAM rather than writing it to the CAM multiple times. • Apply an input policy map to an interface.
PAGE 716
You can apply the same policy map to multiple interfaces, and you can modify a policy map after you apply it. Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment By default while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, Dell Networking OS does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields. These fields are overhead; only the fields from MAC destination address to the CRC are used for forwarding and are included in these rate metering calculations.
PAGE 717
Queue Classification Requirements for PFC Functionality Queue classification requirements for PFC functionality are mentioned below: • On untagged ports, Queue classification must be based on DSCP. • On tagged ports, Queue classification must be based on Dot1p. Layer 3 classification configurations should not be present on the port. • On hybrid ports, Queue classification can be based on either Dot1p (for tagged packets) or DSCP (for untagged packets) but not both.
PAGE 718
enabled in switch B. When queue 1 in switch B gets congested, PFC will be generated for priority 2 which will be honored in switch A. You will not get the below CLI errors after adding this support: Dell(conf)#qos-policy-input qos-input Dell(conf-qos-policy-in)#set mac-dot1p 5 % Error: Dot1p marking is not allowed on L3 Input Qos Policy.
PAGE 719
Figure 101. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1. Create a WRED profile. CONFIGURATION mode wred-profile 2. Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values. WRED mode threshold Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell Networking OS should apply the profile.
PAGE 720
wred Displaying Default and Configured WRED Profiles To display the default and configured WRED profiles, use the following command. • Display default and configured WRED profiles and their threshold values. EXEC mode show qos wred-profile Displaying WRED Drop Statistics To display WRED drop statistics, use the following command. • Display the number of packets Dell Networking OS the WRED profile drops.
PAGE 721
• • Estimated CAM — the estimated number of CAM entries that the policy will consume when it is applied to an interface. Status — indicates whether the specified policy-map can be completely applied to an interface in the port-pipe. – Allowed — indicates that the policy-map can be applied because the estimated number of CAM entries is less or equal to the available number of CAM entries. The number of interfaces in the port-pipe to which the policy-map can be applied is given in parentheses.
PAGE 722
You can use the rate-shape pps peak-rate burst-packets command in the QoS Policy Out Configuration mode to configure the peak rate and burst size as a measure of pps. Alternatively, you can use the rate shape kbps peak-rate burst-KB command to configure the peak rate and peak burst size as a measure of bytes.
PAGE 723
feature to configure a weight for WRED and ECN functionality for front-end ports is supported on the S6000 platform. The WRED congestion avoidance functionality drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed. Traffic is a mixture of various kinds of packets. The rate at which some types of packets arrive might be greater than others.
PAGE 724
are used– one for loss-based queues and the other for lossless (priority-based flow control (PFC)) queues. You can enable WRED and ECN configuration on the global service-pools. You can define WRED profiles and weight on each of the global service-pools for both loss-based and lossless (PFC) service- pools.
PAGE 725
Queue Configuration Service-Pool Configuration WRED Threshold Relationship Q threshold = QT, Service pool threshold = SP-T Expected Functionality ECN marking to shared buffer limits of the service-pool and then packets are tail dropped. SP-T < Q-T Same as above but ECN marking starts above SP-T. Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes The functionality to configure a weight factor for the WRED and ECN functionality for backplane ports is supported on the Z9000 platform.
PAGE 726
4. Associate the service class with the WRED profile, and assign the WRED profile to specific queues on backplane ports. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf) #service-class wred green queue5 thresh-1 queue7 thresh-2 backplane Dell(conf) #service-class wred yellow queue1 thresh-2 queue3 thresh-1 backplane Dell(conf) #service-class wred weight queue0 11 queue6 4 queue7 9 backplane 5.
PAGE 727
• Because this functionality forcibly marks all the packets matching the specific match criteria as ‘yellow’, Dell Networking OS does not support Policer based coloring and this feature concurrently. • If single rate two color policer is configured along with this feature, then by default all packets less than PIR would be considered as “Green” But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”.
PAGE 728
In such a condition, it is necessary that the switch is capable to take differentiated actions for ECN/NonECN packets. After classifying packets to ECN/Non-ECN, marking ECN and Non-ECN packets to different color packets is performed. Policy based ingress QOS involves the following three steps to achieve QOS: 1. Classification of incoming traffic. 2. Specify the differentiated actions for different traffic class. 3. Attach the policy-map to the interface.
PAGE 729
• FIN • SYN • PSH • RST • URG You can now use the ‘ecn’ match qualifier along with the above TCP flag for classification.
PAGE 730
Approach without explicit ECN match qualifiers for ECN packets: ! ip access-list standard dscp_50 seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40 seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_
PAGE 731
Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface To process Layer 3 packets that contain a dot1p (IEEE 802.1p) VLAN Layer 2 header, configure VLAN tags on a Layer 3 port interface which is configured with an IP address but has no VLAN associated with it. You can also configure a VLAN sub-interface on the port interface and apply a policy map that classifies packets using the dot1p VLAN ID.
PAGE 732
Depending on the buffer space statistical values that you can obtain, you can modify the settings for buffer area to achieve enhanced reliability and efficiency in the handling of packets. This evaluation and administration of buffer statistics is useful and important in deployments that experience congestion frequently. The receive buffer must be large enough to save all data that is received when the system processes a PFC PAUSE frame. You can use the service-class buffer shared-threshold-weight queue0 ..
PAGE 733
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 38 Routing information protocol (RIP) is supported on the S6000 platform. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. Protocol Overview RIP is the oldest interior gateway protocol. There are two versions of RIP: RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2).
PAGE 734
Implementation Information Dell Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in Dell Networking OS. Table 61.
PAGE 735
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in Dell Networking OS. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1. Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on Dell Networking OS. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2. Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
PAGE 736
192.162.2.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:21, Fa 0/0 192.162.2.0/24 auto-summary 192.161.1.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:27, Fa 0/0 192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 0/0 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary To disable RIP globally, use the no router rip command in CONFIGURATION mode. Configure RIP on Interfaces When you enable RIP globally on the system, interfaces meeting certain conditions start receiving RIP routes.
PAGE 737
• distribute-list prefix-list-name in Assign a configured prefix list to all outgoing RIP routes. ROUTER RIP mode distribute-list prefix-list-name out To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Adding RIP Routes from Other Instances In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the RIP process.
PAGE 738
• Set the RIP versions received on that interface. INTERFACE mode • ip rip receive version [1] [2] Set the RIP versions sent out on that interface. INTERFACE mode ip rip send version [1] [2] Examples of the RIP Process To see whether the version command is configured, use the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. The following example shows the RIP configuration after the ROUTER RIP mode version command is set to RIPv2.
PAGE 739
Automatic network summarization is in effect Outgoing filter for all interfaces is Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send FastEthernet 0/0 2 1 2 Routing for Networks: 10.0.0.
PAGE 740
Controlling Route Metrics As a distance-vector protocol, RIP uses hop counts to determine the best route, but sometimes the shortest hop count is a route over the lowest-speed link. To manipulate RIP routes so that the routing protocol prefers a different route, manipulate the route by using the offset command. Exercise caution when applying an offset command to routers on a broadcast network, as the router using the offset command is modifying RIP advertisements before sending out those advertisements.
PAGE 741
Dell#debug ip rip RIP protocol debug is ON Dell# To disable RIP, use the no debug ip rip command. RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names.
PAGE 742
Core 2 RIP Output The examples in the section show the core 2 RIP output. Examples of the show ip Commands to View Core 2 Information • To display Core 2 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. • To display Core 2 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. • To display Core 2 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command. The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 2.
PAGE 743
The following example shows the show ip protocols command to show the RIP configuration activity on Core 2.
PAGE 744
Examples of the show ip Commands to View Learned RIP Routes on Core 3 The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 3. Core3#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 7 10.11.10.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.2, 00:00:13, GigabitEthernet 10.200.10.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.2, 00:00:13, GigabitEthernet 10.300.10.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.2, 00:00:13, GigabitEthernet 10.11.20.0/24 directly connected,GigabitEthernet 10.11.30.
PAGE 745
GigabitEthernet 3/44 2 2 GigabitEthernet 3/43 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.11.20.0 10.11.30.0 192.168.2.0 192.168.1.0 Routing Information Sources: Gateway Distance Last Update 10.11.20.2 120 00:00:22 Distance: (default is 120) Core3# RIP Configuration Summary Examples of Viewing RIP Configuration on Core 2 and Core 3 The following example shows viewing the RIP configuration on Core 2. ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/11 ip address 10.11.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.11.20.
PAGE 746
ip address 192.168.2.1/24 no shutdown ! router rip version 2 network 10.11.20.0 network 10.11.30.0 network 192.168.1.0 network 192.168.2.
PAGE 747
Remote Monitoring (RMON) 39 Remote monitoring (RMON) is supported on the S6000 platform. RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment.
PAGE 748
• • long as the master RPM had been running long enough to sample all the data. NMS backs up all the long-term data collection and displays the failover downtime from the performance graph. Chassis Down — When a chassis goes down, all sampled data is lost. But the RMON configurations are saved in the configuration file. The sampling process continues after the chassis returns to operation. Platform Adaptation — RMON supports all Dell Networking chassis and all Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces.
PAGE 749
The following example configures RMON alarm number 10. The alarm monitors the MIB variable 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20.1 (ifEntry.ifOutErrors) once every 20 seconds until the alarm is disabled, and checks the rise or fall of the variable. The alarm is triggered when the 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.20.1 value shows a MIB counter increase of 15 or more (such as from 100000 to 100015). The alarm then triggers event number 1, which is configured with the RMON event command. Possible events include a log entry or an SNMP trap.
PAGE 750
– controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. – integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON Statistics Table. The value must be unique in the RMON Statistic Table. – owner: (Optional) specifies the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. – ownername: (Optional) records the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. The default is a null-terminated string.
PAGE 751
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 40 Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is supported on the S6000 platform. Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanning-tree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). The Dell Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 62.
PAGE 752
Important Points to Remember • RSTP is disabled by default. • Dell Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command.
PAGE 753
3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Example of Verifying an Interface is in Layer 2 Mode and Enabled To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. The bold lines indicate that the interface is in Layer 2 mode.
PAGE 754
Figure 103. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. Dell#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
PAGE 755
BPDU : sent 121, received 2 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 379 (GigabitEthernet 2/3) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.379 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
PAGE 756
Modifying Global Parameters You can modify RSTP parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in the Rapid Spanning Tree group. • Forward-delay — the amount of time an interface waits in the Listening state and the Learning state before it transitions to the Forwarding state. • Hello-time — the time interval in which the bridge sends RSTP BPDUs.
PAGE 757
NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. • The default is 2 seconds. Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
PAGE 758
To view the current values for interface parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps collectively, use this command. Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Influencing RSTP Root Selection RSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it is selected as the root bridge.
PAGE 759
• If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware. • When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. • When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the error disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware).
PAGE 760
The range is from 50 to 950 milliseconds. Example of Verifying Hello-Time Interval Dell(conf-rstp)#do show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e811.2233 Root Bridge hello time 50 ms, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e811.2233 We are the root Configured hello time 50 ms, max age 20, forward delay 15 NOTE: The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second.
PAGE 761
Software-Defined Networking (SDN) 41 Dell Networking operating software supports Software-Defined Networking (SDN). For more information, refer to the SDN Deployment Guide.
PAGE 762
Service Provider Bridging 42 Service provider bridging is supported on the S6000 platform. VLAN Stacking Virtual local area network (VLAN) stacking is supported on the S6000 platform. VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.
PAGE 763
Figure 104. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLANStack-enabled VLAN. • Dell Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
PAGE 764
Configure VLAN Stacking Configuring VLAN-Stacking is a three-step process. 1. Creating Access and Trunk Ports 2. Assign access and trunk ports to a VLAN (Creating Access and Trunk Ports). 3. Enabling VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN.
PAGE 765
interface GigabitEthernet 7/12 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk no shutdown Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN To enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN, use the following command. • Enable VLAN-Stacking for the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stacking-enabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q.
PAGE 766
To configure trunk ports, use the following commands. 1. Configure a trunk port to carry untagged, single-tagged, and double-tagged traffic by making it a hybrid port. INTERFACE mode portmode hybrid 2. Add the port to a 802.1Q VLAN as tagged or untagged.
PAGE 767
• MT — stacked trunk • MU — stacked access port • T — 802.1Q trunk port • U — 802.1Q access port • NU — Native VLAN (untagged) Dell# debug member vlan 603 vlan id : 603 ports : Gi 2/47 (MT), Gi 3/1(MU), Gi 3/25(MT), Gi 3/26(MT), Gi 3/27(MU) Dell#debug member port gigabitethernet 2/47 vlan id : 603 (MT), 100(T), 101(NU) Dell# VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes.
PAGE 768
Figure 105.
PAGE 769
Figure 106.
PAGE 770
Figure 107. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet drop precedence is available on the S6000 platform. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
PAGE 771
Table 64. Drop Eligibility Behavior Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Normal Port Normal Port Retain CFI Set CFI to 0. Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. • Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
PAGE 772
Marking Egress Packets with a DEI Value On egress, you can set the DEI value according to a different mapping than ingress. For ingress information, refer to Honoring the Incoming DEI Value. To mark egress packets, use the following command. • Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet.
PAGE 773
• • Mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the original C-Tag dot1p. In this case, you must have other dot1p QoS configurations; this option is classic dot1p marking. Mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the S-Tag dot1p. For example, if frames with C-Tag dot1p values 0, 6, and 7 are mapped to an S-Tag dot1p value 0, all such frames are sent to the queue associated with the S-Tag 802.1p value 0.
PAGE 774
service-policy input in layer2 no shutdown Mapping C-Tag to S-Tag dot1p Values To map C-Tag dot1p values to S-Tag dot1p values and mark the frames accordingly, use the following commands. 1. Allocate CAM space to enable queuing frames according to the C-Tag or the S-Tag.
PAGE 775
Figure 109. VLAN Stacking without L2PT You might need to transport control traffic transparently through the intermediate network to the other region. Layer 2 protocol tunneling enables BPDUs to traverse the intermediate network by identifying frames with the Bridge Group Address, rewriting the destination MAC to a user-configured non-reserved address, and forwarding the frames.
PAGE 776
the intermediate network because only Dell Networking OS could recognize the significance of the destination MAC address and rewrite it to the original Bridge Group Address. In Dell Networking OS version 8.2.1.0 and later, the L2PT MAC address is user-configurable, so you can specify an address that non-Dell Networking systems can recognize and rewrite the address at egress edge. Figure 110. VLAN Stacking with L2PT Implementation Information • L2PT is available for STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ BPDUs.
PAGE 777
Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1. Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2. Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3. Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN.
PAGE 778
4. Set a maximum rate at which the RPM processes BPDUs for L2PT. VLAN STACKING mode protocol-tunnel rate-limit The default is: no rate limiting. The range is from 64 to 320 kbps. Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.
PAGE 779
sFlow 43 Configuring sFlow is supported on the S6000 platform. Overview The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports sFlow version 5. sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers. sFlow uses two types of sampling: • Statistical packet-based sampling of switched or routed packet flows.
PAGE 780
Important Points to Remember • The Dell Networking OS implementation of the sFlow MIB supports sFlow configuration via snmpset. • Dell Networking recommends the sFlow Collector be connected to the Dell Networking chassis through a line card port rather than the route processor module (RPM) management Ethernet port. • Dell Networking OS exports all sFlow packets to the collector. A small sampling rate can equate to many exported packets.
PAGE 781
69 sFlow Linecard Gi 1/16: Gi 1/17: Linecard Gi 3/40: samples dropped due to sub-sampling 1 Port set 0 H/W sampling rate 8192 configured rate 8192, actual rate 8192, sub-sampling rate 1 configured rate 16384, actual rate 16384, sub-sampling rate 2 3 Port set 1 H/W sampling rate 16384 configured rate 16384, actual rate 16384, sub-sampling rate 1 If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (shown in bold).
PAGE 782
Dell#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.
PAGE 783
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Line Card) Dell#show sflow stack-unit 1 stack-unit 1 Samples rcvd from h/w :165 Samples dropped for sub-sampling :69 Total UDP packets exported :77 UDP packets exported via RPM :77 UDP packets dropped : Configuring Specify Collectors The sflow collector command allows identification of sFlow collectors to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. You can specify up to two sFlow collectors. If you specify two collectors, the samples are sent to both.
PAGE 784
As a result of back-off, the actual sampling-rate of an interface may differ from its configured sampling rate. You can view the actual sampling-rate of the interface and the configured sample-rate by using the show sflow command. sFlow on LAG ports When a physical port becomes a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Enabling Extended sFlow The S-Series platforms support extended-switch information processing only.
PAGE 785
0 0 0 0 UDP packets exported UDP packets dropped sFlow samples collected sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling Important Points to Remember • To export extended-gateway data, BGP must learn the IP destination address. • If the IP destination address is not learned via BGP the Dell Networking system does not export extended-gateway data. • If the IP source address is learned via IGP, srcAS and srcPeerAS are zero.
PAGE 786
IP SA IP DA srcAS and srcPeerAS dstAS and dstPeerAS Description where is source is reachable over ECMP. BGP 786 BGP Exported Exported Extended gateway data is packed.
PAGE 787
44 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Simple network management protocol (SNMP) is supported on the S6000 platform. NOTE: On Dell Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd). Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements.
PAGE 788
Configuration mode. When the FIPS mode is enabled on the system, SNMPv3 operates in a FIPScompliant manner, and only the FIPS-approved algorithm options are available for SNMPv3 user configuration. When the FIPS mode is disabled on the system, all options are available for SNMPv3 user configuration.
PAGE 789
Configuration Task List for SNMP Configuring SNMP version 1 or version 2 requires a single step. NOTE: The configurations in this chapter use a UNIX environment with net-snmp version 5.4. This environment is only one of many RFC-compliant SNMP utilities you can use to manage your Dell Networking system using SNMP. Also, these configurations use SNMP version 2c. • Creating a Community Configuring SNMP version 3 requires configuring SNMP users in one of three methods.
PAGE 790
Creating a Community For SNMPv1 and SNMPv2, create a community to enable the community-based security in Dell Networking OS. The management station generates requests to either retrieve or alter the value of a management object and is called the SNMP manager. A network element that processes SNMP requests is called an SNMP agent. An SNMP community is a group of SNMP agents and managers that are allowed to interact.
PAGE 791
• snmp-server group group-name 3 noauth auth read name write name Configure an SNMPv3 view. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} NOTE: To give a user read and write view privileges, repeat this step for each privilege type. • Configure the user with an authorization password (password privileges only). CONFIGURATION mode • snmp-server user name group-name 3 noauth auth md5 auth-password Configure an SNMP group (password privileges only).
PAGE 792
• Read the value of a single managed object. • snmpget -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.instance} Read the value of the managed object directly below the specified object. • snmpgetnext -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.instance} Read the value of many objects at once. snmpwalk -v version -c community agent-ip {identifier.instance | descriptor.
PAGE 793
Configuring Contact and Location Information using SNMP You may configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system or from the management station using SNMP. To configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system and from the management station using SNMP, use the following commands. • (From a Dell Networking system) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number).
PAGE 794
Subscribing to Managed Object Value Updates using SNMP By default, the Dell Networking system displays some unsolicited SNMP messages (traps) upon certain events and conditions. You can also configure the system to send the traps to a management station. Traps cannot be saved on the system. Dell Networking OS supports the following three sets of traps: • • • RFC 1157-defined traps — coldStart, warmStart, linkDown, linkUp, authenticationFailure, and egpNeighbborLoss.
PAGE 795
snmp coldstart snmp linkdown snmp linkup SNMP_COLD_START: Agent Initialized - SNMP COLD_START. SNMP_WARM_START:Agent Initialized - SNMP WARM_START. PORT_LINKDN:changed interface state to down:%d PORT_LINKUP:changed interface state to up:%d Enabling a Subset of SNMP Traps You can enable a subset of Dell Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps using one of the following listed command options. To enable a subset of Dell Networking enterprise-specific SNMP traps, use the following command.
PAGE 796
exceeds threshold of %dC) MAJOR_TEMP_CLR: Major alarm cleared: chassis temperature lower (%s %d temperature is within threshold of %dC) envmon fan FAN_TRAY_BAD: Major alarm: fantray %d is missing or down FAN_TRAY_OK: Major alarm cleared: fan tray %d present FAN_BAD: Minor alarm: some fans in fan tray %d are down FAN_OK: Minor alarm cleared: all fans in fan tray %d are good vlt Enable VLT traps.
PAGE 797
from SNMP OID %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_FALLING_THRESHOLD: STACKUNIT0 falling threshold alarm from SNMP OID %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_RISING_THRESHOLD: STACKUNIT0 high-capacity rising threshold alarm from SNMP OID Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP To do the following, use SNMP from a remote client.
PAGE 798
MIB Object OID Object Values Description is set to runningconfig or startupconfig, copySrcFileName is not required. copyDestFileType . 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1. 1.5 1 = Dell Networking OS file Specifies the type of file to copy to. 2 = running-config • 3 = startup-config • copyDestFileLocation . 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1. 1.6 1 = flash If copySourceFileType is running-config or startup-config, the default copyDestFileLocatio n is flash.
PAGE 799
Copying a Configuration File To copy a configuration file, use the following commands. NOTE: In UNIX, enter the snmpset command for help using the following commands. Place the f10-copy-config.mib file in the directory from which you are executing the snmpset command or in the snmpset tool path. 1. Create an SNMP community string with read/write privileges. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community community-name rw 2. Copy the f10-copy-config.
PAGE 800
• Copy the running-config to the startup-config from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 2 copyDestFileType.index i 3 Examples of Copying Configuration Files The following examples show the command syntax using MIB object names and the same command using the object OIDs. In both cases, a unique index number follows the object. The following example shows copying configuration files using MIB object names. > snmpset -v 2c -r 0 -t 60 -c private -m .
PAGE 801
Copying the Startup-Config Files to the Server via FTP To copy the startup-config to the server via FTP from the UNIX machine, use the following command. Copy the startup-config to the server via FTP from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 2 copyDestFileName.index s filepath/filename copyDestFileLocation.index i 4 copyServerAddress.index a server-ip-address copyUserName.index s server-login-id copyUserPassword.
PAGE 802
s filepath/filename copyDestFileType.index i 3 copyServerAddress.index a server-ip-address copyUserName.index s server-login-id copyUserPassword.index s server-login-password Example of Copying a Binary File From the Server to the Startup-Configuration via FTP > snmpset -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType. 10 i 1 copySrcFileLocation.10 i 4 copyDestFileType.10 i 3 copySrcFileName.10 s /home/ myfilename copyServerAddress.10 a 172.16.1.56 copyUserName.
PAGE 803
Obtaining a Value for MIB Objects To obtain a value for any of the MIB objects, use the following command. • Get a copy-config MIB object value. snmpset -v 2c -c public -m ./f10-copy-config.mib force10system-ip-address [OID.index | mib-object.index] index: the index value used in the snmpset command used to complete the copy operation. NOTE: You can use the entire OID rather than the object name. Use the form: OID.index.
PAGE 804
Assigning a VLAN Alias Write a character string to the dot1qVlanStaticName object to assign a name to a VLAN. Example of Assigning a VLAN Alias using SNMP [Unix system output] > snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 . 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.1107787786 s "My VLAN" SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.1.
PAGE 805
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 SNMPv2-SMI::mib-2.17.7.1.4.3.1.4.1107787786 = Hex-STRING: 40 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Example of Adding a Tagged Port to a VLAN using SNMP In the following example, Port 0/2 is added as a tagged member of VLAN 10. >snmpset -v2c -c mycommunity 10.11.131.185 . 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.4.3.1.2.
PAGE 806
and 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.6 Enabling and Disabling a Port using SNMP To enable and disable a port using SNMP, use the following commands. 1. Create an SNMP community on the Dell system. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community 2. From the Dell Networking system, identify the interface index of the port for which you want to change the admin status. EXEC Privilege mode show interface Or, from the management system, use the snmpwwalk command to identify the interface index. 3.
PAGE 807
Table 68. MIB Objects for Fetching Dynamic MAC Entries in the Forwarding Database MIB Object OID MIB Description dot1dTpFdbTable .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.3 Q-BRIDGE MIB List the learned unicast MAC addresses on the default VLAN. dot1qTpFdbTable .1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7.1.2. 2 Q-BRIDGE MIB List the learned unicast MAC addresses on nondefault VLANs. dot3aCurAggFdb Table .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2. 1.1.5 F10-LINKAGGREGATION -MIB List the learned MAC addresses of aggregated links (LAG).
PAGE 808
-------------Query from Management Station--------------------->snmpwalk -v 2c -c techpubs 10.11.131.162 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.2.1.1.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.1.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.1 = 1000 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.2.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.1 = STRING: 00 01 E8 06 95 AC SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.3.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.1 = SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.5.1.4.1000.0.1.232.6.149.172.
PAGE 809
Table 69. MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions MIB Object OID Description MIB chSysSwInPartitionAImg 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2. Vers 8.1.11 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition A. Chassis MIB chSysSwInPartitionBImg 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2. Vers 8.1.12 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition B.
PAGE 810
dot3aCurAggIndex SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.3.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 = INTEGER: 1 dot3aCurAggStatus SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.4.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 = INTEGER: 1 << Status active, 2 – status inactive Example of Viewing Changed Interface State for Monitored Ports Layer 3 LAG does not include this support. SNMP trap works for the Layer 2 / Layer 3 / default mode LAG. SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.
PAGE 811
Storm Control 45 Storm control is supported on the S6000 platform. The storm control feature allows you to control unknown-unicast and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell Networking OS supports broadcast control (the storm-control broadcast command) for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. Configure Storm Control Storm control is supported in INTERFACE mode and CONFIGURATION mode.
PAGE 812
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 46 The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on the S6000 platform. Protocol Overview STP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1d — that eliminates loops in a bridged topology by enabling only a single path through the network. By eliminating loops, the protocol improves scalability in a large network and allows you to implement redundant paths, which can be activated after the failure of active paths.
PAGE 813
Important Points to Remember • • • • • STP is disabled by default. The Dell Networking OS supports only one spanning tree instance (0). For multiple instances, enable the multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) or per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). You may only enable one flavor of spanning tree at any one time. All ports in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the spanning tree topology at the time you enable the protocol.
PAGE 814
To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1. If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode.
PAGE 815
Figure 112. Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To enable STP globally, use the following commands. 1. Enter PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol spanning-tree 0 2. Enable STP. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode no disable Examples of Verifying Spanning Tree Information To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
PAGE 816
To view the spanning tree configuration and the interfaces that are participating in STP, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. R2#show spanning-tree 0 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 0001.e826.ddb7 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Current root has priority 32768, address 0001.e80d.
PAGE 817
spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hellotime, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends that only experienced network administrators change the spanning tree parameters. Poorly planned modification of the spanning tree parameters can negatively affect network performance. The following table displays the default values for STP.
PAGE 818
PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally. Modifying Interface STP Parameters You can set the port cost and port priority values of interfaces in Layer 2 mode. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type.
PAGE 819
CAUTION: Enable PortFast only on links connecting to an end station. PortFast can cause loops if it is enabled on an interface connected to a network. To enable PortFast on an interface, use the following command. • Enable PortFast on an interface.
PAGE 820
• When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. • When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the Error Disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware). • The reset linecard command does not clear the Error Disabled state of the port or the Hardware Disabled state. The interface continues to be disables in the hardware.
PAGE 821
• disables spanning tree on an interface • drops all BPDUs at the line card without generating a console message Example of Blocked BPDUs Dell(conf-if-gi-0/7)#do show spanning-tree rstp brief Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e805.fb07 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 0001.e85d.0e90 Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Name PortID Prio ---------- -------Gi 0/6 128.
PAGE 822
Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Dell# STP Root Guard STP root guard is supported on the platform. Use the STP root guard feature in a Layer 2 network to avoid bridging loops. In STP, the switch in the network with the lowest priority (as determined by STP or set with the bridge-priority command) is selected as the root bridge. If two switches have the same priority, the switch with the lower MAC address is selected as the root.
PAGE 823
Figure 114. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with STP root guard: • Root guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface except when used as a stacking port.
PAGE 824
• Enable root guard on a port or port-channel interface. INTERFACE mode or INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode spanning-tree {0 | mstp | rstp | pvst} rootguard – 0: enables root guard on an STP-enabled port assigned to instance 0. – mstp: enables root guard on an MSTP-enabled port. – rstp: enables root guard on an RSTP-enabled port. – pvst: enables root guard on a PVST-enabled port.
PAGE 825
STP Loop Guard STP loop guard is supported only on the platform. The STP loop guard feature provides protection against Layer 2 forwarding loops (STP loops) caused by a hardware failure, such as a cable failure or an interface fault. When a cable or interface fails, a participating STP link may become unidirectional (STP requires links to be bidirectional) and an STP port does not receive BPDUs. When an STP blocking port does not receive BPDUs, it transitions to a Forwarding state.
PAGE 826
Figure 115. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
PAGE 827
• You cannot enable root guard and loop guard at the same time on an STP port. For example, if you configure loop guard on a port on which root guard is already configured, the following error message is displayed: % Error: RootGuard is configured. Cannot configure LoopGuard. • Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port results in a port that remains in a blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it.
PAGE 828
47 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on the S6000 platform. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. In the release 9.4.(0.0), support for reaching an NTP server through different VRFs is included. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
PAGE 829
certain fields in the message, recalculates the checksum and returns the message immediately. Information included in the NTP message allows the client to determine the server time regarding local time and adjust the local clock accordingly. In addition, the message includes information to calculate the expected timekeeping accuracy and reliability, as well as select the best from possibly several servers.
PAGE 830
Implementation Information Dell Networking systems can only be an NTP client. Configure the Network Time Protocol Configuring NTP is a one-step process. • Enabling NTP Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring NTP Broadcasts • Setting the Hardware Clock with the Time Derived from NTP • Disabling NTP on an Interface • Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default.
PAGE 831
CONFIGURATION mode ntp update-calendar Example of Updating the System Clock Relative to NTP R5/R8(conf)#do show calendar 06:31:02 UTC Mon Mar 13 1989 R5/R8(conf)#ntp update-calendar 1 R5/R8(conf)#do show calendar 06:31:26 UTC Mon Mar 13 1989 R5/R8(conf)#do show calendar 12:24:11 UTC Thu Mar 12 2009 Configuring NTP Broadcasts With Dell Networking OS, you can receive broadcasts of time information. You can set interfaces within the system to receive NTP information through broadcast.
PAGE 832
– For a 1-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword GigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. – For a loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number between 0 and 16383. – For a port channel interface, enter the keyword lag then a number from 1 to 255 for TeraScale and ExaScale. – For a SONET interface, enter the keyword sonet then the slot/port information. – For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
PAGE 833
4. Configure an NTP server. CONFIGURATION mode ntp server ip-address [key keyid] [prefer] [version number] Configure the IP address of a server and the following optional parameters: • key keyid: configure a text string as the key exchanged between the NTP server and the client. • prefer: enter the keyword prefer to set this NTP server as the preferred server. • version number: enter a number as the NTP version. The range is from 1 to 3.
PAGE 834
NOTE: • Leap Indicator (sys.leap, peer.leap, pkt.leap) — This is a two-bit code warning of an impending leap second to be inserted in the NTP time scale. The bits are set before 23:59 on the day of insertion and reset after 00:00 on the following day. This causes the number of seconds (rollover interval) in the day of insertion to be increased or decreased by one.
PAGE 835
Dell Networking OS Time and Date You can set the time and date using the Dell Networking OS CLI. Configuration Task List The following is a configuration task list for configuring the time and date settings.
PAGE 836
– month: enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. – day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. – year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035.
PAGE 837
– time-zone: enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name displays in the show clock output. – start-month: enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. – start-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. – start-year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035.
PAGE 838
– start-day: Enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. – start-year: Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. – start-time: Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm.
PAGE 839
Tunneling 48 Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, OSPFv2, and OSPFv3 are also supported. ICMP error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported. Configuring a Tunnel You can configure a tunnel in IPv6 mode, IPv6IP mode, and IPIP mode. You can configure a tunnel in IPv6 mode, IPv6IP mode, and IPIP mode.
PAGE 840
ipv6 address 2::1/64 tunnel destination 90.1.1.1 tunnel source 60.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 3 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.
PAGE 841
Configuring a Tunnel Interface You can configure the tunnel interface using the ip unnumbered and ipv6 unnumbered commands. To configure the tunnel interface to operate without a unique explicit ip or ipv6 address, select the interface from which the tunnel will borrow its address. The following sample configuration shows how to use the tunnel interface configuration commands. Dell(conf-if-te-0/0)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/0 ip address 20.1.1.
PAGE 842
Configuring Tunnel source anylocal Decapsulation The tunnel source anylocal command allows a multipoint receive-only tunnel to decapsulate tunnel packets addressed to any IPv4 or IPv6 (depending on the tunnel mode) address configured on the switch that is operationally UP. The source anylocal parameters can be used for packet decapsulation instead of the ip address or interface (tunnel allow-remote command), but only on multipoint receive-only mode tunnels.
PAGE 843
Multipoint Receive-Only Type and IP Unnumbered Interfaces for Tunnels Multipoint receive-only type IP Tunnel is now supported in S6000 platform. This is a new type of tunnel that is expected to only decapsulate packets from remote end points but never forwards packets on the tunnel. Additional level of protection on the receive-only type IP tunnels is available by allowing only a given prefix/range of remote peers. IP unnumbered interface address configuration on the IP Tunnels is now supported.
PAGE 844
49 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes. Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center. You can reach Technical Support: • On the web: http://support.dell.
PAGE 845
Virtual LANs (VLANs) 50 Virtual LANs (VLANs) are supported on the S6000 platform. VLANs are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
PAGE 846
By default, VLAN 1 is the Default VLAN. To change that designation, use the default vlan-id command in CONFIGURATION mode. You cannot delete the Default VLAN. NOTE: You cannot assign an IP address to the Default VLAN. To assign an IP address to a VLAN that is currently the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and assign it to be the Default VLAN. For more information about assigning IP addresses, refer to Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN. • Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN.
PAGE 847
information is preserved as the frame moves through the network. The following example shows the structure of a frame with a tag header. The VLAN ID is inserted in the tag header. Figure 117. Tagged Frame Format The tag header contains some key information that Dell Networking OS uses: • The VLAN protocol identifier identifies the frame as tagged according to the IEEE 802.1Q specifications (2 bytes). • Tag control information (TCI) includes the VLAN ID (2 bytes total).
PAGE 848
• Configure a port-based VLAN (if the VLAN-ID is different from the Default VLAN ID) and enter INTERFACE VLAN mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id To activate the VLAN, after you create a VLAN, assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to the VLAN. Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
PAGE 849
The following example shows the steps to add a tagged interface (in this case, port channel 1) to VLAN 4. To view the interface’s status. Interface (po 1) is tagged and in VLAN 2 and 3, use the show vlan command. In a port-based VLAN, use the tagged command to add the interface to another VLAN. The show vlan command output displays the interface’s (po 1) changed status. Except for hybrid ports, only a tagged interface can be a member of multiple VLANs.
PAGE 850
Moving Untagged Interfaces To move untagged interfaces from the Default VLAN to another VLAN, use the following commands. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode of the VLAN to which you want to assign the interface. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Configure an interface as untagged. INTERFACE mode untagged interface This command is available only in VLAN interfaces.
PAGE 851
4 Dell# Active T U Gi 3/1 Gi 3/2 The only way to remove an interface from the Default VLAN is to place the interface in Default mode by using the no switchport command in INTERFACE mode. Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN VLANs are a Layer 2 feature. For two physical interfaces on different VLANs to communicate, you must assign an IP address to the VLANs to route traffic between the two interfaces.
PAGE 852
To configure a port so that it can be a member of an untagged and tagged VLANs, use the following commands. 1. Remove any Layer 2 or Layer 3 configurations from the interface. INTERFACE mode 2. Configure the interface for Hybrid mode. INTERFACE mode portmode hybrid 3. Configure the interface for Switchport mode. INTERFACE mode switchport 4. Add the interface to a tagged or untagged VLAN.
PAGE 853
VLT Proxy Gateway 51 You can configure a proxy gateway in VLT domains. A proxy gateway enables you to locally route the packets that are destined to a L3 endpoint in another VLT domain. Proxy Gateway in VLT Domains Using a proxy gateway, the VLT peers in a domain can route the L3 packets destined for VLT peers in another domain as long as they have L3 reachability of these IP destinations.
PAGE 854
When the routing table across DCs is not symmetrical, there is a possibility of a routing miss by a DC that do not have the route for the L3 traffic. Since routing protocols will enabled and both the DC’s comes in same subnet there will not be route asymmetry dynamically. But if static route is configured on one DC and not on the other, it will result is asymmetry. Proxy routing can still be achieved locally by configuring a static route or default gateway.
PAGE 855
8. LLDP port channel interface can’t be changed to legacy lag when proxy gateway is enabled. 9.“vlt-peer-mac transmit” is recommended only for square VLT without any diagonal links. 10. VRRP and IPv6 routing is not supported now. 11. With the existing hardware capabilities, only 512 my_station_tcam entries can be supported. 12. PVLAN not supported 13. After VM Motion, it’s expected that VM Host will send GARP in term, host previous VLT Domain will have mac movement points to newer VLT Domain 14.
PAGE 856
• There are only a couple of MACs for each unit to be transmitted so that all current active MACs can definitely be carried on the newly defined TLV. • This TLV is recognizable only by FTOS devices with this feature support. Other device will ignore this field and should still be able to process other standard TLVs. The LLDP organizational TLV passes local DA information to peer VLT domain devices so they can act as proxy gateway.
PAGE 857
2. Trace route across VLT domains may show extra hops. 3. IP route symmetry must be maintained across the VLT domains. Assume if the route to a destination is not available at C2, though the packet hits the MY_STATION_TCAM and routing is enabled for that VLAN, if there is no entry for that prefix in the routing table it will dropped to CPU. By default, all route miss packets are given to CPU. To avoid this static entry must be configured. 4.
PAGE 858
8. Packet duplication – Assume exclude-vlan (say VLAN 10) is configured on C2/D2 for C1’s MAC. If packets for VLAN 10 with C1’s MAC get a hit at C2, they will be switched to both D2 (via ICL) and C1 via inter DC link. This could lead to packet duplication. So, if C1’s MAC is learnt at C2 then the packet would not have flooded (to D2) and only switched to C1 and thus avoided packet duplication. Configuring a Static VLT Proxy Gateway You can configure a proxy gateway in VLT domains.
PAGE 859
3. You can configure the port channel interface for an LLDP proxy gateway and exclude a VLAN or a range of VLANs from proxy routing. This parameter is for an LLDP proxy gateway configuration. VLT DOMAIN PROXY GW LLDP mode Dell(conf-vlt-domain-proxy-gw-lldp)#peer-domain-link port-channel interface exclude-vlan vlan-range 4. Display the VLT proxy gateway configuration.
PAGE 860
Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) 52 Virtual link trunking (VLT) is supported on the S6000 platform. Overview VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
PAGE 861
Figure 118. VLT on Switches VLT on Core Switches You can also deploy VLT on core switches. Uplinks from servers to the access layer and from access layer to the aggregation layer are bundled in LAG groups with end-to-end Layer 2 multipathing. This set up requires “horizontal” stacking at the access layer and VLT at the aggregation layer such that all the uplinks from servers to access and access to aggregation are in Active-Active Load Sharing mode.
PAGE 862
Figure 119. Enhanced VLT VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the vitality of VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces.
PAGE 863
Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. • If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT. Refer to Configure Rapid Spanning Tree. • Dell Networking strongly recommends that the VLTi (VLT interconnect) be a static LAG and that you disable LACP on the VLTi.
PAGE 864
• In a scenario where one hundred hosts are connected to a Peer1 on a non-VLT domain and traffic flows through Peer1 to Peer2; when you move these hosts from a non-VLT domain to a VLT domain and send ARP requests to Peer1, only half of these ARP requests reach Peer1, while the remaining half reach Peer2 (beacuse of LAG hashing). The reason for this behavior is that Peer1 ignores the ARP requests that it receives on VLTi (ICL) and updates only the ARP requests that it receives on the local VLT.
PAGE 865
– The system automatically includes the required VLANs in VLTi. You do not need to manually select VLANs. – VLT peer switches operate as separate chassis with independent control and data planes for devices attached to non-VLT ports. – Port-channel link aggregation (LAG) across the ports in the VLT interconnect is required; individual ports are not supported. Dell Networking strongly recommends configuring a static LAG for VLTi.
PAGE 866
– The chassis backup link does not carry control plane information or data traffic. Its use is restricted to health checks only. • Virtual link trunks (VLTs) between access devices and VLT peer switches – To connect servers and access switches with VLT peer switches, you use a VLT port channel, as shown in Overview. Up to 48 port-channels are supported; up to eight member links are supported in each port channel between the VLT domain and an access device.
PAGE 867
– Dell Networking does not recommend enabling peer-routing if the CAM is full. To enable peerrouting, a minimum of two local DA spaces for wild card functionality are required. • Software features supported on VLT physical ports – In a VLT domain, the following software features are supported on VLT physical ports: 802.1p, LLDP, flow control, IPv6 dynamic routing, port monitoring, and jumbo frames.
PAGE 868
Primary and Secondary VLT Peers Primary and Secondary VLT Peers are supported on the platform. To prevent issues when connectivity between peers is lost, you can designate Primary and Secondary roles for VLT peers . You can elect or configure the Primary Peer. By default, the peer with the lowest MAC address is selected as the Primary Peer. You can configure another peer as the Primary Peer using the VLT domain domain-id role priority priority-value command.
PAGE 869
When the bandwidth usage drops below the 80% threshold, the system generates another syslog message (shown in the following message) and an SNMP trap. %STKUNIT0-M:CP %VLTMGR-6-VLT-LAG-ICL: Overall Bandwidth utilization of VLT-ICLLAG (port-channel 25) reaches below threshold.
PAGE 870
PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT The designated router functionality of the PIM Sparse-Mode multicast protocol is supported on VLT peer switches for multicast sources and receivers that are connected to VLT ports. VLT peer switches can act as a last-hop router for IGMP receivers and as a first-hop router for multicast sources. Figure 120.
PAGE 871
(DR) if they are incorrectly hashed. In addition to being first-hop or last -hop routers, the peer node can also act as an intermediate router. On a VLT-enabled PIM router, if any PIM neighbor is reachable through a Spanned Layer 3 (L3) VLAN interface, this must be the only PIM-enabled interface to reach that neighbor. A Spanned L3 VLAN is any L3 VLAN configured on both peers in a VLT domain. This does not apply to server-side L2 VLT ports because they do not connect to any PIM routers.
PAGE 872
local DA entries in TCAM. In case a VLT node is down, a timer that allows you to configure the amount of time needed for peer recovery provides resiliency. You can enable VLT unicast across multiple configurations using VLT links. You can enable ECMP on VLT nodes using VLT unicast. VLT unicast routing is supported on both IPv6/IPv4. To enable VLT unicast routing, both VLT peers must be in L3 mode. Static route and routing protocols such as RIP, OSPF, ISIS, and BGP are supported.
PAGE 873
• VLT resiliency — After a VLT link or peer failure, if the traffic hashes to the VLT peer, the traffic continues to be routed using multicast until the PIM protocol detects the failure and adjusts the multicast distribution tree. • Optimal routing — The VLT peer that receives the incoming traffic can directly route traffic to all downstream routers connected on VLT ports.
PAGE 874
Non-VLT ARP Sync Synchronization for non-ARP routing table entries is supported on the platform. ARP entries (including ND entries) learned on other ports are synced with the VLT peer to support station move scenarios. NOTE: ARP entries learned on non-VLT, non-spanned VLANs are not synced with VLT peers. RSTP Configuration RSTP is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure RSTP in the network. RSTP is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase.
PAGE 875
Sample RSTP Configuration The following is a sample of an RSTP configuration. Using the example shown in the Overview section as a sample VLT topology, the primary VLT switch sends BPDUs to an access device (switch or server) with its own RSTP bridge ID. BPDUs generated by an RSTP-enabled access device are only processed by the primary VLT switch. The secondary VLT switch tunnels the BPDUs that it receives to the primary VLT switch over the VLT interconnect.
PAGE 876
Configuring a VLT Interconnect To configure a VLT interconnect, follow these steps. 1. Configure the port channel for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2.
PAGE 877
Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain To enable VLT and create a VLT domain, use the following steps. 1. Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The domain ID range is from 1 to 1000. Configure the same domain ID on the peer switch to allow for common peering. VLT uses the domain ID to automatically create a VLT MAC address for the domain.
PAGE 878
Configuring a VLT Backup Link To configure a VLT backup link, use the following command. 1. Specify the management interface to be used for the backup link through an out-of-band management network. CONFIGURATION mode interface managementethernet slot/ port Enter the slot (0-1) and the port (0). 2. Configure an IPv4 address (A.B.C.D) or IPv6 address (X:X:X:X::X) and mask (/x) on the interface.
PAGE 879
Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2. (Optional) After you configure the VLT domain on each peer switch on both sides of the interconnect trunk, by default, Dell Networking OS elects a primary and secondary VLT peer device.
PAGE 880
Connecting a VLT Domain to an Attached Access Device (Switch or Server) To connect a VLT domain to an attached access device, use the following commands. On a VLT peer switch: To connect to an attached device, configure the same port channel ID number on each peer switch in the VLT domain. 1. Configure the same port channel to be used to connect to an attached device and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2. Remove an IP address from the interface.
PAGE 881
Configuring a VLT VLAN Peer-Down (Optional) To configure a VLT VLAN peer-down, use the following commands. 1. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number The range is from 1 to 128. 3.
PAGE 882
3. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 4. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number The range is from 1 to 128. 5. Configure the IP address of the management interface on the remote VLT peer to be used as the endpoint of the VLT backup link for sending out-of-band hello messages.
PAGE 883
8. Configure enhanced VLT. Configure the port channel to be used for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command in the Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. 9. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode switchport 10.
PAGE 884
VLT Sample Configuration To review a sample VLT configuration setup, study these steps. 1. Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. VLT DOMAIN mode vlt domain domain id 2. Configure the VLTi between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3. You can configure LACP/static LAG between the peer units (not shown).
PAGE 885
13. Verify that the VLT LAG is running in both VLT peer units. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface Example of Configuring VLT In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is , VLT peer 2 is , and the ToR is S60-1. NOTE: If you use a third-party ToR unit, Dell Networking recommends using static LAGs with VLT peers to avoid potential problems if you reboot the VLT peers. Configure the VLT domain with the same ID in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2.
PAGE 886
Configure the VLT links between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the Top of Rack unit. In the following example, port Te 0/40 in VLT peer 1 is connected to Te 0/48 of TOR and port Te 0/18 in VLT peer 2 is connected to Te 0/50 of TOR. 1. Configure the static LAG/LACP between the ports connected from VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the Top of Rack unit. 2. Configure the VLT peer link port channel id in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3.
PAGE 887
no ip address switchport no shutdown s60-1# s60-1#show interfaces port-channel 100 brief Codes: L - LACP Port-channel L LAG 100 Mode L2 Status up Uptime 03:33:48 s60-1# Ports Te 0/48 (Up) Te 0/50 (Up) Verify VLT is up. Verify that the VLTi (ICL) link, backup link connectivity (heartbeat status), and VLT peer link (peer chassis) are all up.
PAGE 888
Figure 121. eVLT Configuration Example eVLT Configuration Step Examples In Domain 1, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1#configure Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-1)# channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/8-9 Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#vlt domain 1000 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.16.130.
PAGE 889
Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.16.130.12 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# system-mac mac-address 00:0a:00:0a:00:0a Domain_1_Peer2(conf-vlt-domain)# unit-id 1 Configure eVLT on Peer 2. Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 2.
PAGE 890
Configure eVLT on Peer 4. Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# switchport Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 4.
PAGE 891
Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches. • Display information on backup link operation. EXEC mode • show vlt backup-link Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch.
PAGE 892
Examples of the show vlt and show spanning-tree rstp Commands The following example shows the show vlt backup-link command. Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.
PAGE 893
The following example shows the show vlt detail command. Dell_VLTpeer1# show vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------100 127 Peer LAG Id ----------100 2 Local Status Peer Status Active VLANs ------------ ----------- ------------UP UP 10, 20, 30 UP UP 20, 30 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt detail Local LAG Id -----------2 100 Peer LAG Id ----------127 100 Local Status -----------UP UP Peer Status ----------UP UP Active VLANs ------------20, 30 10, 20, 30 The following example shows the show vlt role command.
PAGE 894
Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt statistics VLT Statistics ---------------HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: ICL Hello's Sent: ICL Hello's Received: 994 978 89 89 The following example shows the show spanning-tree rstp command. The bold section displays the RSTP state of port channels in the VLT domain. Port channel 100 is used in the VLT interconnect trunk (VLTi) to connect to VLT peer2. Port channels 110, 111, and 120 are used to connect to access switches or servers (vlt).
PAGE 895
Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 1) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link and interconnect trunk (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#vlt domain 999 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.11.206.35 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-vlt-domain)#exit Configure the backup link. Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-0/0)#ip address 10.11.206.
PAGE 896
Configure the backup link. Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-ma-0/0)#ip address 10.11.206.35/ Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-ma-0/0)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-if-ma-0/0)#exit Configure the VLT interconnect (VLTi).
PAGE 897
Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information. NOTE: For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact, contact your Dell Networking representative. Table 72. Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above the 80% threshold and when it drops below 80%.
PAGE 898
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take that the MAC address is the same on both units. The VLT peer does not boot up. The VLTi is forced to a down state. The VLT peer does not boot up. The VLTi is forced to a down state. A syslog error message is generated. A syslog error message is generated. Version ID mismatch A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated. A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated.
PAGE 899
Specifying VLT Nodes in a PVLAN You can configure VLT peer nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN). VLT enables redundancy without the implementation of Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and provides a loop-free network with optimal bandwidth utilization. Because the VLT LAG interfaces are terminated on two different nodes, PVLAN configuration of VLT VLANs and VLT LAGs are symmetrical and identical on both the VLT peers. PVLANs provide Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same VLAN.
PAGE 900
not validated if you associate an ICL to a PVLAN. Similarly, if you dissociate an ICL from a PVLAN, although the PVLAN parity exists, ICL is removed from that PVLAN. Association of VLTi as a Member of a PVLAN If a VLAN is configured as a non-VLT VLAN on both the peers, the VLTi link is made a member of that VLAN if the VLTi link is configured as a PVLAN or normal VLAN on both the peers.
PAGE 901
PVLAN Operations When a VLT Peer is Restarted When the VLT peer node is rebooted, the VLAN membership of the VLTi link is preserved and when the peer node comes back online, a verification is performed with the newly received PVLAN configuration from the peer. If any differences are identified, the VLTi link is either added or removed from the VLAN. When the peer node restarts and returns online, all the PVLAN configurations are exchanged across the peers.
PAGE 902
VLT LAG Mode PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 Peer1 Peer2 Promiscuo us Trunk Primary Primary Yes No Trunk Access Primary Secondary No No Promiscuo us Promiscuo us Primary Primary Yes Yes Promiscuo us Access Primary Secondary No No Promiscuo us Promiscuo us Primary Primary Yes Yes - Secondary (Community) - Secondary (Isolated) No No Secondary (Community) Secondary (Isolated) No No • • Yes Yes Access Promiscuo us Acc
PAGE 903
VLT LAG Mode PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 Peer1 Peer2 Access Access Secondary (Community) Secondary (Community) No No - Primary VLAN Y - Primary VLAN X No No Promiscuo us Access Primary Secondary No No Trunk Access Primary/Normal Secondary No No Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN You can configure the VLT peers or nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
PAGE 904
4. Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown 5. To configure the VLT interconnect, repeat Steps 1–4 on the VLT peer switch. 6. Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 7. Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number The range is from 1 to 128. 8.
PAGE 905
5. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN to which you want to assign the PVLAN interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 6. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 7. To obtain maximum VLT resiliency, configure the PVLAN IDs and mappings to be identical on both the VLT peer nodes. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to primary. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode primary 8. Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN.
PAGE 906
proxy ARP. For example, consider a sample topology in which VLAN 100 is configured on two VLT nodes, node 1 and node 2. ICL link is not configured between the two VLT nodes. Assume that the VLAN 100 IP address in node 1 is 10.1.1.1/24 and VLAN 100 IP address in node 2 is 20.1.1.2/24. In this case, if the ARP request for 20.1.1.1 reaches node 1, node 1 will not perform the ARP request for 20.1.1.2. Proxy ARP is supported only for the IP address belongs to the received interface IP network.
PAGE 907
VLT Nodes as Rendezvous Points for Multicast Resiliency You can configure virtual link trunking (VLT) peer nodes as rendezvous points (RPs) in a Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) domain. PIM uses a VLT node as the RP to distribute multicast traffic to a multicast group. Messages to join the multicast group (Join messages) and data are sent towards the RP, so that receivers can discover who the senders are and begin receiving traffic destined for the multicast group.
PAGE 908
Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) 53 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on the S6000 platform. Overview S6000 device acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network.
PAGE 909
• Network Virtualization Platform (NVP) Controller • VTEP (VXLAN Tunnel End Point) • VXLAN Gateway • VXLAN Hypervisor • Service Node (SN) • Legacy TOR Network Virtualization Platform (NVP) Controller NVP Controller is the network controller for managing cloud components. The OVSDB protocol is the protocol used for communication between VTEPs and the controller. In the current release, the qualified controller for the VXLAN Gateway function is NSX-from VMWare.
PAGE 910
Functional Overview of VXLAN Gateway The following section is the functional overview of VXLAN Gateway: 1. Provides connectivity between a Virtual server infrastructure and a Physical server infrastructure. 2. Provides the functions performed by a VTEP in a virtual server infrastructure. The functions of a VTEP are: • VTEP is responsible for creating one or more logical networks.
PAGE 911
Components of VXLAN Frame Format Some of the important fields of the VXLAN frame format are described below: Outer Ethernet Header: Outer IP Header: Outer UDP Header: VXLAN Header : Frame Check Sequence (FCS): The Outer Ethernet Header consists of the following components: • Destination Address: Generally, it is a first hop router's MAC address when the VTEP is on a different address. • Source Address : It is the source MAC address of the router that routes the packet.
PAGE 912
To create a Hypervisor or server, the required fields are the IP address and SSL certificate of the server. The following are the snapshots of the user interface for creating a Hypervisor: 2.
PAGE 913
To create service node, the required fields are the IP address and SSL certificate of the server. The Service node is responsible for broadcast/unknown unicast/multicast traffic replication. The following is the snapshot of the user interface for the creation of service node: 3. Create VXLAN Gateway To create a VXLAN L2 Gateway, the IP address of the Gateway is mandatory. The following is the snapshot of the user interface in creating a VXLAN Gateway 4.
PAGE 914
NOTE: For more details about NVP controller configuration, refer to the NVP user guide from VMWare . Configuring VxLAN Gateway To configure the VxLAN gateway on the S6000 platform, follow these steps: 1. Connecting to NVP controller 2. Advertising VXLAN access ports to controller Connecting to an NVP Controller To connect to an NVP controller, use the following commands. 1. feature vxlan CONFIGURATION mode feature vxlan You must configure feature VXLAN to configure vxlan-instance. 2.
PAGE 915
6. fail-mode (Optional) VxLAN INSTANCE mode fail-mode secure If the local VTEP loses connectivity with the controller, it will delete all its database and hardware flows/resources. 7. no shut VxLAN INSTANCE mode Advertising VXLAN Access Ports to Controller To advertise the access ports to the controller, use the following command. In INTERFACE mode, vxlan-instance command configures a VXLAN-Access Port into a VXLANinstance.
PAGE 916
Rx Bytes : 1317 Tx Packets : 13 Tx Bytes : 1321 The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance physical-locator command. Dell#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 physical-locator Instance : 1 Tunnel : count 1 36.1.1.1 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance unicast-mac-local command.
PAGE 917
Tunnel Key : 2 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 192.168.122.133 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) Port Vlan Bindings: Te 0/80: VLAN: 0 (0x80000001), Fo 0/124: VLAN: 0 (0x80000004), The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance statistics interface command.
PAGE 918
Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) 54 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time. VRF Overview VRF improves functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented without using multiple devices.
PAGE 919
Figure 122. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs).
PAGE 920
A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device. Only Layer 3 interfaces can belong to a VRF.
PAGE 921
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF FRRP (if applicable) for VLANs Yes No Multicast protocols (PIM-SM, PIM-DM, MSDP) Yes No Layer 3 (IPv4/IPv6) ACLs, TraceLists, PBR, QoS on VLANs Yes Yes Layer 3 (IPv4/IPv6) ACLs, TraceLists, PBR, QoS on physical interfaces and LAGs Yes IPv4 ARP Yes Yes IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Yes No Layer 2 ACLs on VLANs Yes No FEED Yes No Layer 2 QoS Yes Yes Support for storm-control (broadcast and unknownunicas
PAGE 922
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF BGP Yes No ACL Yes Yes Multicast Yes No NDP Yes No RAD Yes No Ingress/Egress Storm-Control (per-interface/global) Yes No DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance. VRF Configuration The VRF configuration tasks are: 1. Enabling VRF in Configuration Mode 2. Creating a Non-Default VRF 3.
PAGE 923
Task Command Syntax Command Mode Create a non-default VRF instance by specifying a name and VRF ID number, and enter VRF configuration mode. ip vrf vrf-name vrf-id VRF CONFIGURATION ID range: 1 to 63 and 0 (default VRF) Assigning an Interface to a VRF You must enter the ip vrf forwarding command before you configure the IP address or any other setting on an interface.
PAGE 924
Configuring VRRP on a VRF Instance You can configure the VRRP feature on interfaces that belong to a VRF instance. In a virtualized network that consists of multiple VRFs, various overlay networks can exist on a shared physical infrastructure. Nodes (hosts and servers) that are part of the VRFs can be configured with IP static routes for reaching specific destinations through a given gateway in a VRF.
PAGE 925
Figure 123.
PAGE 926
Figure 124. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in Figure1 and Figure 2.
PAGE 927
Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/0 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 7/0 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 7/1 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 7/2 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 128 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.
PAGE 928
Router 2 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/0 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 9/18 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 11.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 9/19 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 21.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface GigabitEthernet 9/20 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 31.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 128 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.
PAGE 929
The following shows the output of the show commands on Router 1. Router 1 Dell#show ip vrf VRF-Name VRF-ID Interfaces default-vrf 0 blue 1 orange 2 green 3 Dell#show ip ospf 1 neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State 1.0.0.2 1 FULL/DR Dell#sh ip ospf 2 neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State 2.0.0.
PAGE 930
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway Last Change --------------------------C 2.0.0.0/24 Direct, Vl 192 00:20:55 C 20.0.0.0/24 Direct, Gi 7/1 0/0 00:10:05 O 21.0.0.0/24 via 2.0.0.
PAGE 931
9/0-17,21-47, Gi 11/0-47, Gi 12/0-47, Gi 13/0-47, blue 1 orange 9/19, 2 green Dell#show ip ospf 1 neighbor Neighbor ID Pri Interface Area 1.0.0.1 1 FULL/BDR 128 0 ! Dell#sh ip ospf 2 neighbor Neighbor ID Pri Interface Area 2.0.0.1 1 FULL/BDR 192 0 ! Dell#show ip route vrf blue Ma 0/0, Ma 1/0, Nu 0, Vl 1 Gi 9/18, Vl 128 Gi Vl 192 Gi 9/20, Vl 256 3 State Dead Time 00:00:36 State Dead Time 00:00:33 Address 1.0.0.1 Vl Address 2.0.0.
PAGE 932
L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Last Change --------------------C 2.0.0.0/24 00:26:44 O 20.0.0.0/24 00:14:22 C 21.0.0.0/24 0/0 Gateway Dist/Metric ------- ----------- Direct, Vl 192 via 2.0.0.
PAGE 933
ip vrf forwarding VRF2 ip address 140.0.0.1/24 ip route vrf VRF1 20.0.0.0/16 140.0.0.2 vrf VRF2 ip route vrf VRF2 40.0.0.0/16 120.0.0.
PAGE 934
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 55 Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported on the S6000 platform. VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN). The MASTER router is chosen from the virtual routers by an election process and forwards packets sent to the next hop IP address.
PAGE 935
Figure 125. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. VRRP Implementation Within a single VRRP group, up to 12 virtual IP addresses are supported.
PAGE 936
CAUTION: Increasing the advertisement interval increases the VRRP Master dead interval, resulting in an increased failover time for Master/Backup election. Take caution when increasing the advertisement interval, as the increased dead interval may cause packets to be dropped during that switch-over time. VRRP Configuration By default, VRRP is not configured. Configuration Task List The following list specifies the configuration tasks for VRRP.
PAGE 937
Examples of Configuring and Verifying VRRP The following examples how to configure VRRP. Dell(conf)#int gi 1/1 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
PAGE 938
NOTE: Carefully following this procedure, otherwise you might introduce dual master switches issues. To migrate an IPv4 VRRP Group from VRRPv2 to VRRPv3: 1. Set the backup switches to VRRP version to both. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-te-0/1-vrid-100)#version both Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-te-0/2-vrid-100)#version both 2. Set the master switch to VRRP protocol version 3. Dell_master_switch(conf-if-te-0/1-vrid-100)#version 3 3. Set the backup switches to version 3.
PAGE 939
Configuring a Virtual IP Address To configure a virtual IP address, use the following commands. 1. Configure a VRRP group. INTERFACE mode vrrp-group vrrp-id The VRID range is from 1 to 255. 2. Configure virtual IP addresses for this VRID. INTERFACE -VRID mode virtual-address ip-address1 [...ip-address12] The range is up to 12 addresses. Examples of the Configuring and Verifying a Virtual IP Address The following example shows how to configure a virtual IP address.
PAGE 940
Authentication: (none) -----------------GigabitEthernet 1/2, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.2.1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.10.2.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 27, Gratuitous ARP sent: 2 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.3 Authentication: When the VRRP process completes its initialization, the State field contains either Master or Backup.
PAGE 941
Virtual IP address: 10.10.2.2 10.10.2.3 Authentication: (none) Dell(conf)# Configuring VRRP Authentication Simple authentication of VRRP packets ensures that only trusted routers participate in VRRP processes. When you enable authentication, Dell Networking OS includes the password in its VRRP transmission. The receiving router uses that password to verify the transmission.\ NOTE: You must configure all virtual routers in the VRRP group the same: you must enable authentication with the same password or aut
PAGE 942
no preempt Examples of Disabling Preempt Re-enable preempt by entering the preempt command. When you enable preempt, it does not display in the show commands, because it is a default setting. The following example shows how to disable preempt using the no preempt command. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#no preempt Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)# The following example shows how to verify preempt is disabled using the show conf command.
PAGE 943
• The default is 1 second. For VRRPv3, change the advertisement centisecs interval setting. INTERFACE-VRID mode advertise-interval centisecs centisecs The range is from 25 to 4075 centisecs in units of 25 centisecs. The default is 100 centisecs. Examples of the advertise-interval Command The following example shows how to change the advertise interval using the advertise-interval command.
PAGE 944
• Port channel: enter port-channel number. • SONET: enter sonet slot/port. • VLAN: enter vlan vlan-id. – The valid VLAN IDs are from 1 to 4094. For a virtual group, you can also track the status of a configured object (the track object-id command) by entering its object number. NOTE: You can configure a tracked object for a VRRP group (using the track object-id command in INTERFACE-VRID mode) before you actually create the tracked object (using a track object-id command in CONFIGURATION mode).
PAGE 945
The following example shows how to verify tracking using the show conf command. Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)#show conf ! vrrp-group 111 advertise-interval 10 authentication-type simple 7 387a7f2df5969da4 no preempt priority 255 track GigabitEthernet 1/2 virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 virtual-address 10.10.10.10 Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1-vrid-111)# The following example shows verifying the tracking status.
PAGE 946
vrrp-ipv6-group 1 track 2 priority-cost 20 track 3 priority-cost 30 virtual-address 2007::1 virtual-address fe80::1 no shutdown Setting VRRP Initialization Delay VRRP initialization delay is supported on the S6000 platform. When configured, VRRP is enabled immediately upon system reload or boot. You can delay VRRP initialization to allow the IGP and EGP protocols to be enabled prior to selecting the VRRP Master. This delay ensures that VRRP initializes with no errors or conflicts.
PAGE 947
Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes.
PAGE 948
Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#int gi 2/31 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-gi-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-gi-2/31)#show conf ! interface GigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 99 priority 200 virtual-address 10.1.1.
PAGE 949
Figure 127. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
PAGE 950
Although R2 and R3 have the same default, priority (100), R2 is elected master in the VRRPv3 group because the GigE 0/0 interface has a higher IPv6 address than the GigE 1/0 interface on R3.
PAGE 951
VRRP in a VRF Configuration The following example shows how to enable VRRP operation in a VRF virtualized network for the following scenarios. • Multiple VRFs on physical interfaces running VRRP. • Multiple VRFs on VLAN interfaces running VRRP. To view a VRRP in a VRF configuration, use the show commands. VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Scenario The following example shows how to enable VRRP in a non-VLAN.
PAGE 952
Figure 128. VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Example Example of Configuring VRRP in a VRF on Switch-1 (Non-VLAN) Switch-1 S1(conf)#ip vrf default-vrf 0 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 12/1 S1(conf-if-gi-12/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-gi-12/1)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-gi-12/1)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177.
PAGE 953
! S1(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 12/3 S1(conf-if-gi-12/3)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-3 S1(conf-if-gi-12/3)#ip address 20.1.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-gi-12/3)#vrrp-group 15 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-gi-12/3-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-gi-12/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.
PAGE 954
VRRP in VRF: Switch-1 VLAN Configuration VRRP in VRF: Switch-2 VLAN Configuration Switch-1 S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface GigabitEthernet 12/4 S1(conf-if-gi-12/4)#no ip address S1(conf-if-gi-12/4)#switchport S1(conf-if-gi-12/4)#no shutdown ! S1(conf-if-gi-12/4)#interface vlan 100 S1(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.
PAGE 955
S2(conf-if-vl-100-vrid-101)#priority 255 S2(conf-if-vl-100-vrid-101)#virtual-address 10.10.1.2 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-gi-12/4)#interface vlan 200 S2(conf-if-vl-200)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-2 S2(conf-if-vl-200)#ip address 10.10.1.2/24 S2(conf-if-vl-200)#tagged gigabitethernet 12/4 S2(conf-if-vl-200)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 2 will be 178. S2(conf-if-vl-200-vrid-101)#priority 255 S2(conf-if-vl-200-vrid-101)#virtual-address 10.10.1.
PAGE 956
S-Series Debugging and Diagnostics 56 This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the S6000 platform. Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, Level 0 diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
PAGE 957
Running Offline Diagnostics To run offline diagnostics, use the following commands. For more information, refer to the examples following the steps. 1. Place the unit in the offline state. EXEC Privilege mode offline stack-unit id You cannot enter this command on a MASTER or Standby stack unit. NOTE: The system reboots when the offline diagnostics complete. This is an automatic process.
PAGE 958
Also reboot/online command is necessary for normal operation after the offline command is issued. Proceed with Offline [confirm yes/no]:yes Dell#Mar 12 10:32:18: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %CHMGR-2-STACKUNIT_DOWN: Stack unit 0 down - stack unit offline Mar 12 10:32:18: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-1-DEL_PORT: Removed port: Te 0/0-3,16-27,32-55,64-67,80-83,88-99,104-107,112-123, Fo 0/4,8,12,28,56,60,68,72,76,84,100,108,124, The following example shows the show system brief command.
PAGE 959
Proceed with Diags [confirm yes/no]: yes Warning - diagnostic execution will cause multiple link flaps on the peer side - advisable to shut directly connected ports Proceed with Diags [confirm yes/no]: yes Dell#00:03:13: %S25P:2 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_STARTED: Starting diags on stack unit 2 00:03:13 : Approximate time to complete these Diags ... 6 Min 00:03:13 : Diagnostic test results will be stored on stack unit 2 file: flash:/ TestReport-SU-2.
PAGE 960
Test 5 - Psu Status Monitor Test .................................... NOT PRESENT Test 6.000 - Psu0 Fan Speed Monitor Test ............................ PASS diagS6000IsPsuGood[954]: ERROR: Psu:1, Power supply is not present. Test 6.001 - Psu1 Fan Speed Monitor Test ............................ NOT PRESENT Test 6 - Psu Fan Speed Monitor Test ................................. NOT PRESENT Test 7.000 - Psu0 Fan Status Monitor Test ...........................
PAGE 961
I2C Devices Scanned - 20 I2C Device PASS Count - 17 I2C Device FAIL Count - 3 Test 13 - I2c Access Test ........................................... Test 14 - RTC Presence Test ......................................... Test 15 - CPU Sdram Presence Test ................................... Test 16 - CPU Sdram Size Test ...................................... Test 17.000 - System Cpld Access Test ............................... Test 17.001 - Master Cpld Access Test ............................... Test 17.
PAGE 962
configure 13 ports as fanout in each pipe, the system identifies the three ports in each pipe that are not configured in Fanout mode and deletes those entries from the port table. This removal of entries ensures that ports are not created for such pipes. • Entity MIB that uses static port configuration supports all of the ports, including those ports that are configured for fanout. • When you configure 26 ports as fanout, six ports are disabled. For disabled ports, interfaces are not created.
PAGE 963
Figure 129. Port configured in Quad mode. Backward Compatibility With Enhanced Fanout Configuration When you configure fanout on the ports in which fanout is not supported in releases of Dell Networking OS earlier than Release 9.4(0.0), downgrade to an earlier release might cause an unexpected behavior. This phenomenon occurs because in Release 9.4(0.0), static configuration for the restricted ports is maintained. Validation of the restricted ports is performed at the CLI level and not during bootup.
PAGE 964
Egress Drops 0 1 0 4 5 0 8 9 0 12 13 0 16 17 0 20 21 0 24 25 0 28 29 0 32 33 0 36 37 0 40 41 0 44 45 0 48 49 0 52 50 0 56 51 0 60 52 0 64 53 0 68 57 0 72 61 0 76 65 0 80 69 0 84 73 0 88 77 0 92 81 0 96 85 0 100 89 0 104 93 0 108 97 0 112 101 0 116 102 0 12 103 0 964 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
PAGE 965
1 0 104 0 0 0 0 Trace Logs In addition to the syslog buffer, Dell Networking OS buffers trace messages which are continuously written by various Dell Networking OS software tasks to report hardware and software events and status information. Each trace message provides the date, time, and name of the Dell Networking OS process. All messages are stored in a ring buffer. You can save the messages to a file either manually or automatically after failover.
PAGE 966
Recognize an Overtemperature Condition An overtemperature condition occurs, for one of two reasons: the card genuinely is too hot or a sensor has malfunctioned. Inspect cards adjacent to the one reporting the condition to discover the cause. • If directly adjacent cards are not normal temperature, suspect a genuine overheating condition. • If directly adjacent cards are normal temperature, suspect a faulty sensor. When the system detects a genuine over-temperature condition, it powers off the card.
PAGE 967
This message indicates that the specified card is not receiving enough power. In response, the system first shuts down Power over Ethernet (PoE). If the under-voltage condition persists, line cards are shut down, then the RPMs. Troubleshoot an Under-Voltage Condition To troubleshoot an under-voltage condition, check that the correct number of power supplies are installed and their Status light emitting diodes (LEDs) are lit.
PAGE 968
Buffer Tuning Buffer tuning allows you to modify the way your switch allocates buffers from its available memory and helps prevent packet drops during a temporary burst of traffic. The S-Series application-specific integrated circuit (ASICs) implement the key functions of queuing, feature lookups, and forwarding lookups in hardware.
PAGE 969
• Oversubscription ratio = 10 • Dynamic Cell Limit Per port = 59040/29 = 2036 cells Figure 130. Buffer Tuning Points Deciding to Tune Buffers Dell Networking recommends exercising caution when configuring any non-default buffer settings, as tuning can significantly affect system performance. The default values work for most cases. As a guideline, consider tuning buffers if traffic is bursty (and coming from several interfaces). In this case: • Reduce the dedicated buffer on all queues/interfaces.
PAGE 970
• buffer-profile csf csqueue Change the dedicated buffers on a physical 1G interface. BUFFER PROFILE mode • buffer dedicated Change the maximum number of dynamic buffers an interface can request. BUFFER PROFILE mode • buffer dynamic Change the number of packet-pointers per queue. BUFFER PROFILE mode • buffer packet-pointers Apply the buffer profile to a line card. CONFIGURATION mode • buffer fp-uplink linecard Apply the buffer profile to a CSF to FP link.
PAGE 971
To display the default buffer profile, use the show buffer-profile {summary | detail} command from EXEC Privilege mode. The following example shows viewing the default buffer profile. Dell#show buffer-profile detail interface gigabitethernet 0/1 Interface Gi 0/1 Buffer-profile Dynamic buffer 194.88 (Kilobytes) Queue# Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets (Kilobytes) 0 2.50 256 1 2.50 256 2 2.50 256 3 2.50 256 4 9.38 256 5 9.38 256 6 9.38 256 7 9.
PAGE 972
6 7 3.00 3.00 256 256 Using a Pre-Defined Buffer Profile Dell Networking OS provides two pre-defined buffer profiles, one for single-queue (for example, nonquality-of-service [QoS]) applications, and one for four-queue (for example, QoS) applications. You must reload the system for the global buffer profile to take effect, a message similar to the following displays: % Info: For the global pre-defined buffer profile to take effect, please save the config and reload the system..
PAGE 973
! buffer fp-uplink stack-unit 0 port-set 0 buffer-policy fsqueue-hig buffer fp-uplink stack-unit 0 port-set 1 buffer-policy fsqueue-hig ! Interface range gi 0/1 - 48 buffer-policy fsqueue-fp Dell#sho run int gi 0/10 ! interface GigabitEthernet 0/10 no ip address Troubleshooting Packet Loss The show hardware stack-unit command is intended primarily to troubleshoot packet loss. To troubleshoot packet loss, use the following commands.
PAGE 974
Total Egress Drops :0 Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 drops unit 0 Port# :Ingress Drops :IngMac Drops :Total Mmu Drops :EgMac Drops :Egress Drops 1 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 Dell#show hardware stack-unit --- Ingress Drops --Ingress Drops : IBP CBP Full Drops : PortSTPnotFwd Drops : IPv4 L3 Discards : Policy Discards : Packets dropped by FP : (L2+L3) Drops : Port bitmap zero Drops : Rx VLAN Drops : 0 drops unit 0 port 1 30 0 0 0 0 14 0 16 0
PAGE 975
rxHandle noMhdr noMbuf noClus recvd dropped recvToNet rxError rxDatapathErr rxPkt(COS0) rxPkt(COS1) rxPkt(COS2) rxPkt(COS3) rxPkt(COS4) rxPkt(COS5) rxPkt(COS6) rxPkt(COS7) rxPkt(UNIT0) rxPkt(UNIT1) rxPkt(UNIT2) rxPkt(UNIT3) transmitted txRequested noTxDesc txError txReqTooLarge txInternalError txDatapathErr txPkt(COS0) txPkt(COS1) txPkt(COS2) txPkt(COS3) txPkt(COS4) txPkt(COS5) txPkt(COS6) txPkt(COS7) txPkt(UNIT0) :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0
PAGE 976
1649714 packets, 1948622676 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 27234 over 64-byte pkts, 107970 over 127-byte pkts 34 over 255-byte pkts, 504838 over 511-byte pkts, 1009638 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 1649714 Unicasts 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions Rate info (interval 45 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec, 2 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.06 Mbits/sec, 8 packets/sec, 0.
PAGE 977
Mini Core Dumps Dell Networking OS supports mini core dumps on the application and kernel crashes. The mini core dump applies to Master, Standby, and Member units. Application and kernel mini core dumps are always enabled. The mini core dumps contain the stack space and some other minimal information that you can use to debug a crash. These files are small files and are written into flash until space is exhausted. When the flash is full, the write process is stopped.
PAGE 978
--------------------FREE MEMORY--------------uvmexp.free = 0x2312 Enabling TCP Dumps A TCP dump captures CPU-bound control plane traffic to improve troubleshooting and system manageability. When you enable TCP dump, it captures all the packets on the local CPU, as specified in the CLI. You can save the traffic capture files to flash, FTP, SCP, or TFTP. The files saved on the flash are located in the flash://TCP_DUMP_DIR/Tcpdump_/ directory and labeled tcpdump_*.pcap.
PAGE 979
Standards Compliance 57 This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), Dell Networking OS also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website.
PAGE 980
MTU 9,252 bytes RFC and I-D Compliance Dell Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 78. General Internet Protocols RFC# Full Name S-Series 768 User Datagram Protocol 7.6.
PAGE 981
General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols. Table 79. General IPv4 Protocols RFC# Full Name S-Series 791 Internet Protocol 7.6.1 792 Internet Control Message Protocol 7.6.1 826 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol 7.6.1 1027 Using ARP to Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways 7.6.1 1035 DOMAIN NAMES - IMPLEMENTATION AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.
PAGE 982
General IPv6 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv6 protocols. Table 80. General IPv6 Protocols RFC# Full Name S-Series 1886 DNS Extensions to support IP version 6 7.8.1 1981 (Partial) Path MTU Discovery for IP version 6 7.8.1 2460 Internet Protocol, Version 6 (IPv6) Specification 7.8.1 2462 (Partial) IPv6 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration 7.8.1 2464 Transmission of IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.
PAGE 983
RFC# Full Name S-Series/Z-Series 2545 Use of BGP-4 Multiprotocol Extensions for IPv6 Inter-Domain Routing 2796 BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) 2842 Capabilities Advertisement with BGP-4 7.8.1 2858 Multiprotocol Extensions for BGP-4 7.8.1 2918 Route Refresh Capability for BGP-4 7.8.1 3065 Autonomous System Confederations for BGP 7.8.1 4360 BGP Extended Communities Attribute 7.8.1 4893 BGP Support for Four-octet AS Number Space 7.8.
PAGE 984
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 83.
PAGE 985
Multicast The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 85. Multicast RFC# Full Name S-Series 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting 7.8.1 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, 7.8.1 Version 2 2710 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) for IPv6 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol, 7.8.
PAGE 986
RFC# Full Name S4810 S4820T Z-Series Management of TCP/IPbased internets 1157 A Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 7.6.1 1212 Concise MIB Definitions 7.6.1 1215 A Convention for Defining 7.6.1 Traps for use with the SNMP 1493 Definitions of Managed 7.6.1 Objects for Bridges [except for the dot1dTpLearnedEntryDisc ards object] 1724 RIP Version 2 MIB Extension 1850 OSPF Version 2 7.6.1 Management Information Base 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2 7.6.
PAGE 987
RFC# Full Name S4810 S4820T Z-Series Digital Hierarchy (SONET/ SDH) Interface Type 2570 Introduction and Applicability Statements for Internet Standard Management Framework 7.6.1 2571 An Architecture for 7.6.1 Describing Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Frameworks 2572 Message Processing and Dispatching for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 2574 User-based Security 7.6.
PAGE 988
RFC# Full Name S4810 S4820T Z-Series 9.5.(0.0) 9.5.(0.0) radiusAuthClientMalforme dAccessResponses radiusAuthClientUnknown Types radiusAuthClientPacketsD ropped 2698 A Two Rate Three Color Marker 9.5.(0.0) 3635 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Ethernetlike Interface Types 7.6.1 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 7.6.1 2787 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 7.6.
PAGE 989
RFC# Full Name S4810 S4820T Z-Series Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 3418 Management Information 7.6.1 Base (MIB) for the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 3434 Remote Monitoring MIB Extensions for High Capacity Alarms, HighCapacity Alarm Table (64 bits) 7.6.1 3580 IEEE 802.1X Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) Usage Guidelines 7.6.
PAGE 990
RFC# Full Name draft-ietf-isiswgmib- 16 Management Information Base for Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS): S4810 S4820T Z-Series 9.2(0.0) 9.2(0.0) 9.2(0.0) isisSysObject (top level scalar objects) isisISAdjTable isisISAdjAreaAddrTable isisISAdjIPAddrTable isisISAdjProtSuppTable draft-ietf-netmodinterfaces-cfg-03 Defines a YANG data model for the configuration of network interfaces. Used in the Programmatic Interface RESTAPI feature. IEEE 802.1AB Management Information 7.7.
PAGE 991
RFC# Full Name S4810 sFlow.org sFlow Version 5 7.7.1 sFlow.org sFlow Version 5 MIB 7.7.1 FORCE10-BGP4V2-MIB Force10 BGP MIB (draftietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05) 7.8.1 f10–bmp-mib Force10 Bare Metal Provisioning MIB 9.2(0.0) FORCE10-FIB-MIB Force10 CIDR Multipath Routes MIB (The IP Forwarding Table provides information that you can use to determine the egress port of an IP packet and troubleshoot an IP reachability issue.
PAGE 992
RFC# Full Name S4810 FORCE10-SMI Force10 Structure of 7.6.1 Management Information FORCE10-SYSTEM- Force10 System COMPONENT-MIB Component MIB (enables the user to view CAM usage information) 7.6.1 FORCE10-TC-MIB Force10 Textual Convention 7.6.1 FORCE10-TRAPALARM-MIB Force10 Trap Alarm MIB 7.6.1 S4820T Z-Series MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.